SYSTUS RefManAnalysisVol2 en PDF

SYSTUS
2019
REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL
(VOL.2)
www.esi-group.com
SYSTUS 2019
REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL
(VOL.2)
© 2019 by ESI Group
Published: January 2019
GL/SYST/18/08/02/A
This documentation is the confidential and proprietary product of ESI Group.
Any unauthorized use, reproduction, or transfer of this documentation is strictly prohibited.
This documentation is subject to limited distribution and restricted disclosure.
All PAM- and SYS- product names as well as other products belonging to ESI's portfolio are
tradenames or trademarks of ESI Group, unless specifically mentioned. All other trademarks are the
property of their respective owners.
Specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
Contents
CHAPTER 8 TYPES OF ANALYSIS 339

8.1 Introduction 339
8.1.1 Features Common to Analysis of All Types of Structure 340
8.1.2 Residues 341
8.1.3 Interpretation of Computed Results 341
8.1.4 Printing of Results 342
8.2 Beams and Pin-Jointed Frames 346
8.2.1 Introduction 346
8.2.2 Continuous Plane Frames 347
8.2.3 Grids 355
8.2.4 Continuous Three Dimensional Frames 363
8.2.5 Plane Pin-Jointed Frames 378
8.2.6 Three Dimensional Pin-Jointed Frames 383
8.3 Plates and Shells 389
8.3.1 Plates 389
8.3.2 Axisymmetric Shells 395
8.3.3 General Shells 402
8.4 Continuous Media 434
8.4.2 Two Dimensional Analysis 435
8.4.3 Three Dimensional Analysis 451
8.5 Harmonic Loading 463
8.5.1 Harmonic Loading of Shells 465
8.5.2 Harmonic; Loading of Three Dimensional Solids 477
8.6 Thermal and Electromagnetic Analysis 487
8.6.1 Thermal Analysis 487
8.6.2 Electromagnetic Analyses 487
8.6.3 Coupled Analyses 488
8.7 Fluid-Structure Interaction 489
8.7.2 Harmonic Loading of Axisymmetric Shells 490
8.7.4 Coaxial Cylinders 500
8.8 Special Elements 505
8.8.1 Element Type 9 (X9XX) 505
8.8.2 Element Defined by User Supplied Subroutine (type 8) 524
8.8.3 Special Constraint Element (type 6) 527
8.9 Shells Specially Designed for Non-Linear Analysis 533
CONTENTS
8.9.1 SHE8 Spatial Shell Option 533

8.9.2 SHED Axisymmetric Harmonic Shell Option 548
8.9.3 SHET Thermal Shell Option 555
8.10 Mixing Option (MULTI Command) 559
8.10.2 Two Dimensional Structures 560
8.10.3 Three Dimensional Structures 562
8.10.4 Routine of Transition Element Creation 565
8.10.5 Limitation on the Use of Post Processing 566
8.10.6 Example 1: Mixing Options for 2D/Beam Elements 567
8.10.7 Example 2: 3D/Space Shell Mixed Problem 569
8.11 Different Types of Media 576
8.11.1 General 576
8.11.2 Regulation-Adjustment Medium 578
8.11.3 Contacts 582
8.11.4 Trajectory Loading Medium 608
INDEX i
- ii - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

© 2019 ESI Group
CHAPTER 8 TYPES OF ANALYSIS
8.1 Introduction

8.1 INTRODUCTION
For each type of structure SYSTUS possesses a set of analysis routines that model structural
behavior. The routines are grouped according to the type of structure in order to optimize
computation time.
The routines perform calculations according to the mathematical principles upon which the
finite element method is based (variational principles, slope- deflection equations, material
constitutive relations etc.) and pass data to the solution routines.
Their execution is initiated by the commands SOLVE (see Chapter 9), CALCULATE (Chapter
10), DYNAMIC (Chapter 11) or TRANSIENT (Chapter 12).
The choice of type of structure determines the number and type of degrees of freedom per node
for a given type of analysis. Available types of structures are shown in table 8.1.
For each type of structure there is a range of elements each identified by its type code (see
Chapter 4: DEFINITION), consistent will the system of coordinates used.
In table 8.2 are shown the default type codes for each type of structure, which identify standard
element types.
It should be noted that special elements are available of which the type, defined by the second
digit of the element type code, is not zero.
The rule that routines are classified according to type of structure is broken by the routine
CALCULATE (see Chapter 10: substructuring) which for linear static analysis is capable of
analyzing problems involving more than one type of structure, and in some cases is also broken
by the MIXING option (See Chapter 8.10).
Each type of structure is described in detail in later sections, but first an account is given of
characteristics common to all types of structure.
SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL - 339 -

© 2019 ESI Group
8.1 Introduction
8.1.1 Features Common to Analysis of All Types of Structure

l Many load cases may be analyzed simultaneously (static linear analysis only).
l Automatic calculation of the effect of global loads.
l Applied loads may be independent of displacement, as F = Fo, or defined by an elastic
relation F = -K (U - Uo). In the latter case the relation is normally referred to as an elastic
constraint.
l Loads may be concentrated at nodes or uniformly distributed over entire elements.
A number of different loads may simultaneously be applied to a node or over an element.
Constraints at nodes in a local reference frame, which may be possibly inclined with respect to
the global reference frame. Constraints may also be defined over elements.
Maximum problem size (number of nodes, elements, loads, etc.) is limited only by hardware
considerations:
l the size of problem that can be analyzed depends upon how much virtual memory is
available ;
l disk and tape storage has little effect on maximum problem size ;
l word length (bits per floating point value) determines the magnitude of roundoff error which
accumulates during the analysis.

A list of residues, representing unbalanced forces at nodes, is printed so that an estimate can be
made of the significance of roundoff error accumulated during simultaneous equation solution.
Computed results are presented by load case. They consist of at least the following information:
l displacements at all nodes ;
l support reactions at constrained nodes ;
l forces (in the general sense of the term) in all elements, at the centroids of two and three
dimensional elements and at the extremities of beams.
- 340 - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

© 2019 ESI Group
8.1 Introduction
8.1.2 Residues
When subjected to various applied loads a structure (subject to certain constraints) reaches a
state of equilibrium, which corresponds to a set of displacements, strains and stresses.
In reality, the numerically computed solution does not correspond to a perfect state of
equilibrium.
The set of unbalanced forces at nodes resulting from roundoff error during simultaneous
equation solution is referred to as residues, and characterizes the numerical accuracy of the
solution (for more details concerning non- linear analysis see Chapter 12: TRANSIENT
ANALYSIS).
In order for roundoff error to be assessed, SYSTUS prints:
l The greatest residues, by load case and by component of displacement. Note that at
constrained nodes the "residues" are not a very small local unbalanced force if the structure is
stable, but the force with which a support acts on the structure.
l The greatest residue for any node, load case or local direction at a node (component),
excluding of course support reactions at constrained nodes.

l Optionally, residues for all nodes, load cases and components. This possibility can be useful
to check a solution which is satisfactory at the global level, but for which there are certain
excessively large residues corresponding to a local instability.
Note:
l To estimate the numerical precision of a solution, it is necessary to compare the magnitudes of
residues with those of applied loads.
8.1.3 Interpretation of Computed Results

The results given by the analysis for each load case are:
l displacements (in a general sense) at all nodes ;
l support reactions acting on the structure at constrained nodes ;
l forces (in a general sense) in elements.
For beams (elements with two nodes analyzed by the slope deflection method), the forces are
shear and axial force and moments of the same type as the loads acting at the ends of each
element. These forces are those with which the elements act on their nodes, expressed in the
local coordinate system of the element.
For other elements the computed forces are average values conventionally regarded as being
values at the centroid, whether they are stress tensor components or forces.

© 2019 ESI Group
8.1 Introduction
8.1.4 Printing of Results

Pages of results are identified in two ways:
l Overall numbering: pages are numbered sequentially, the title of the problem being printed at
the top of each page.
l Identification of load case: the load case title is also printed at the top of each page.
For each load case, results are printed in the following order:
l displacements at all nodes,
l reactions at all support nodes,
l components of force in each element.
Displacements
For each load case, displacements are printed for all nodes, 50 nodes per page, as follows for
each node:
l The internal node number.
l The external node number.
l Components of displacement (in a general sense: displacement and rotation), expressed in the
global coordinate system. The type of each component is stated in the table header, according
to the type of structure.
Reactions
For each load case the reactions at supports are printed for all constrained nodes (50 nodes per
page).
On each line is printed:
l the internal node number.
l the external node number.
l the components of the action of the structure on the support.
These are components of force in a general sense (forces, moments) the types of which depend
upon the type of structure and are stated in the table header.
These components are referred to the global axes.

© 2019 ESI Group
8.1 Introduction
Forces
For each load case, forces are printed for all elements, 50 or 25 elements per page. On each line
is printed:
l The internal element number.
l The external element number.
l Components of force in the element, the types of which depend both on the type of structure
and on the type of element (whether one, two or three dimensional) in which the force acts.
The interpretation of each component is stated in the table header.
Special case of beams
Forces in pin-jointed or beam elements, calculated according to the slope deflection equations,
are printed in a special format, 25 elements per page. There are two lines of printout per
element.
On the first line is printed:
l the internal element number,
l the external element number,
l the external number of the first node of the element,
l components of force with which the element acts on its first node.
On the second line is printed:
l the external number of the second node of the element,
l components of force with which the element acts on its second node.
The forces with which the element acts on its nodes are always expressed in the local
coordinate system of the element.

© 2019 ESI Group
8.1 Introduction
Type of Structure Computed

Field of Application Coordinates Applied Loads
(n°) Displacements
Continuous plane
X Ux Fx
frames Plane frames loaded in their plane
1 Y Uy Rz Fy Cz
Rx Cx
Grids Beam systems loaded X
2 perpendicular to their plane
Ry Cy
Y
Uz Fz
Continuous three X Ux Rx Fx Cx
Continuous frames in three
dimensional frames
dimensions arbitrarily loaded
Y Uy Ry Fy Cy
3 Z Uz Rz Fz Cz
Plane pin-jointed
frames in their X Ux Fx
Plane pin-jointes frames loaded
plane Y Uy Fy
7
Three dimensional X Ux Fx
Three dimensional pin-jointed
pin-jointed frames
frames arbitrarily loaded
Y Uy Fy
4 Z Uz Fz
Rx Cx
Plates Plates loaded perpendicular to X
2 their plane
Ry Cy
Y
Uz Fz
Axisymmetric
X Ux Fx
shells Thin axisymmetric shells
1 Y Uy Rz Fy Cz
Ux Rx Fx Cx
General shells X
3
Shells of arbitrary geometric form Uy Ry Fy Cy
Y
Uz Rz Fz Cz
Two dimensional membrane
Two dimensional structures, in-plane pin-jointed X Ux Fx
7 beams, plane stress, plane strain, Y Uy Fy
axisymmetry
Three dimensional solid and X Ux Fx
Three dimensional
4
membrane structures, and pin- Y Uy Fy
jointed frames. Z Uz Fz
Three dimensional Two dimensional structures with Ux Fx
X
harmonic loading axial symmetry or symmetry of Uy Fy
4 translation, asymmetrically loaded Y
Uz Fz
Shell, harmonic Thin shells with axial symmetry Ux Fx
X
loading or symmetry of translation, Uy Fy
6 asymmetrically loaded Y
Uz Rz Fz Cz
X
Thermal Heat conduction in a one, two or
5 three dimensional medium
Y T Ω
Z

© 2019 ESI Group
8.1 Introduction
Type of Structure Computed

Field of Application Coordinates Applied Loads
(n°) Displacements
Thermal, harmonic Heat conduction in a domain with
X
loading axial symmetry or symmetry of T Ω
5 translation, asymmetrically loaded Y
Type of structure (number)

TABLE 8.1 – Summary of types of structure
Number of Nodes

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20
Type of Structure
CONTINUOUS PLANE
FRAME
1002
GRIDS 1002
CONTINUOUS 3D
FRAME
1002
PLANE PIN-JOINTED
FRAME
1002
3D PIN-JOINTED
FRAME
1002
AXISYMMETRIC
SHELLS
1 1002
PLATES 1002 2003 2004
GENERAL SHELLS 1002 2003 2004 2006 2008
TWO DIMENSIONAL 1 1002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2012
THREE
DIMENSIONAL
1002 2003 3004 2005 3006 2007 3008 2009 3010 2012 3015 3020
SHELLS, HARMONIC
LOADING
1 1002
3D HARMONIC
LOADING
1 1002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2012
3D THERMAL 1002 2003 3004 2005 3006 2007 3008 2009 3010 2012 3015 3020
2D THERMAL 1002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2012
THERMAL,
HARMONIC 1002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2012
LOADING
TABLE 8.2 – Default element type codes

Printing of results :Default element type codes

© 2019 ESI Group
8.2 Beams and Pin-Jointed Frames
8.2 BEAMS AND PIN-JOINTED FRAMES

8.2.1 Introduction
Included under the heading beams and pin-jointed frames are structures which are composed
entirely of one dimensional elements. A distinction is made between continuous frameworks the
joints or nodes of which transmit both force and moment, and pin-jointed frames the members
of which are subjected to axial load only.

© 2019 ESI Group
8.2.2 Continuous Plane Frames

Field of Application
Linear thermoelastic, static or dynamic analysis of continuous plane frames loaded in their
plane.
The only available material non-linearity is non-linear elasticity.
General Specification
1. Reference Frame
Continuous plane frames are defined in the (x,y) plane.
2. Degrees of Freedom
UX = displacement in the x direction
UY = displacement in the y direction
RZ = rotation about the z axis
3. Components of Load
FX = force in the x direction
FY = force in the y direction
CZ = moment about the z axis
4. Systems of Axes
A rotated system of axes may be defined with respect to either the global system or the local
coordinates of a beam, by an angle PSI.
Figure 8-1

© 2019 ESI Group
Input Data
1. Type of Structure
OPTION PLANE BEAM
All beam elements are analyzed by the slope-deflection method.

2. Elements
Available elements are listed is the following table
Number of Geometric
Code Dimension Description
nodes form
One Beam which obeys slope
1002 2 1
dimensional deflection equations
Special element the stiffness,
Not Not mass and damping matrices and
X9XX any
applicable applicable load vectors of which are
precalculated.
One Special element the stiffness of
1602 2 1
dimensional which varies with displacement
Fluid element, to model inertial
One
1702 2 1 fluid-structure interaction
dimensional
between two coaxial cylinders
Not Not
X8XX Any Special user-supplied element
applicable applicable
Table 8.3
3. Material Properties: Plane Beam Option
a. Axes
Physical properties of beam elements are defined with respect to the local system of axes.
b. Isotropic material
E=e Young's modulus
NU = ν Poisson's ratio
or
G=g Shear modulus, where G =E / 2 (1 + ν)

© 2019 ESI Group
c. Geometry of section
AX or S = s Cross sectional area, constant over the length of the element.
AY = ay Reduced cross sectional area (S/k) of the element, from which is computed shear
displacement. The constant k depends upon the geometric form of the section.
Example: k = 6/5 or 10/9 for a rectangle or circle respectively.
IZ = iz Second moment of inertia of section about the Z axis.
XX = xx Vector defining a rigid lever arm representing the eccentricity of the section
YY = yy centroid.
(XX, YY) is a vector from a point on the straight line joining the nodes to the centroid of a
cross section of the beam.
This vector is defined with respect to the local axis.
VZ Extreme fiber distance to the axis of bending Oz along OY+
VPZ Extreme fiber distance to the axis of bending Oz along OY-
These are parameters required in the calculation of extreme fiber stresses from computed forces
and bending moments. They define the points at which stress is to be calculated with respect to
the neutral fiber, as illustrated below.
d. Thermoelasticity
LX = lx Coefficient of thermal expansion in the axial direction of the element.
e. Density
RHO = ρ Defines density.
RHOMF = ± 1 obtains a mass matrix partially consistant (if = -1, without inertia of section).
We advise you to use this mass matrix for beams where the influence of sheer force is very
important.

© 2019 ESI Group
f. Transient analysis - damping

ALPHA = α The damping matrix of each beam is computed according to the formula :
BETA= β [C] = αi [Ki] + βi [Mi]
g. Non-linear elasticity
VARIABLE = refers to table No. t which defines the behavior law, giving the equivalent stress σ in
t function of the equivalent strain ε.
This table must be type 1 if the relation σ-ε is independent of temperature, or type 7
otherwise.
TABLE
t / 1 ε1, σ1, ε2, σ2, ...
or
TABLE
t / 7 θ1, f1, θ2, f2, ...
f1/ 1 ε1, σ1, ε2, σ2, ...
f2 / 1...
For a table of type 7, the values fi are the numbers of the tables, which must be type 1 and
which describe the relations σ-ε for each temperature θi.
From the mean axial strain εm, the program calculates the stress σ(εm) corresponding to the
behavior law defined previously in the table, and then calculates the Young's modulus value :
Note:
l It is necessary to define the Young's modulus corresponding to a zero strain, specifying the label E
= Eo.
4. Constraints
a. Rigid constraints at nodes
UX, UY, RZ Constrained components of displacement and rotation.
When rigid constraint is defined on a line (see Chapter 4.7.2), the labels above may be replaced
by the following labels:
SYMMETRY prescribed symmetry with respect to the defined line (corresponds to rigid constraint
applied to the degrees of freedom UY and RZ with respect to the local axes associated
with the line)
ANTISYMMETRY prescribed antisymmetry (corresponds to rigid constraint applied to the degree of freedom
UX with respect to the local axes associated with the line)

© 2019 ESI Group
b. Elastic constraints at nodes

KX = kx
KY = ky Components of stiffness concentrated at nodes.
HZ = hz
These correspond to the equations:
FX = -kx (Ux - Uox)
Fy = -ky (Uy - Uoy)
CZ = -hz (Rz - Roz)
VARIABLE = g if g > 0, then, for a non linear computation, table g defines the variation of components of
stiffness with the node displacements, following the general form :
kx = kx0 . g(Ux)
ky = ky0 . g(Uy)
hz = hz0 . g(Rz)
if g < 0, then, table (-g) defines a vectorial function of several variables (see chapters 4.7
and 4.15).
c. Elastic constraints distributed over elements
KX = kx, KY = ky, HZ = hz
Components of stiffness uniformly distributed over elements.
d. System of axes
PSI = ψ Orientation of axes used.
LOCAL The orientation is specified with respect to the local system of the element. (For elastic
constraints distributed over elements only).
e. Transient analysis
FT = f Specifies the number of the table in which is defined the function of time by which the stiffnesses
kx, ky and hz are multiplied.
5. Applied Loads: Plane Beam Option
a. Globally defined loads
SW Dead load of the structure.
In this case the value defined by RHO is taken to be a specific weight (g.ρ).
GX = gx Components of acceleration.
GY = gy
PSI = ψ Orientation of the axes with respect to which acceleration is defined, relative to the global
axes.
THERMAL i Thermoelastic analysis with temperature distribution defined by temperature card i.

© 2019 ESI Group
b. Displacements of supports
UX = Uox Components of imposed displacements
UY = Uoy l of rigidly constrained nodes
RZ = Roz l of elastically constrained nodes
(equation F = K (Uo - U))
l of elastically constrained elements
VARIABLE = g with g < 0, then the table (-g) defines a vectorial function of several variables (see
Chapters 4.8 and 4.15), for the nodes only.
c. Forces concentrated at nodes
FX = fx Components of force and moment.
FY = fy
CZ = cz
VARIABLE = g with g < 0, then table (-g) defines a vectorial function of several variables (see 4.8 and
4.15).
d. Uniformly distributed load (uniform pressure) over elements
PX = px
Components of load per unit length of the element.
PY = py
e. Loads applied to beam elements
Concentrated loads
FX = fx, FY = fy, XX = x
where x is the distance of the point of application of the load from the first node of the element.
Trapezoidal loads
PX = px1, PY = py1, XX = x1,UNTILPX = px2, PY = Py2, XX = x2

© 2019 ESI Group
x1 and x2 are the distances from the first node of the element to the
beginning and end of the trapezoidal load.
By default, x2 is the length of the element.
Restrictions:
l A trapezoidal load may not be applied on several elements with the
same input data line:
ELEM 18 19 /PY=-25 XX=.25 UNTIL PY=-75 XX=.75 RELATI
l Only element 18 is taken into account.
l A trapezoidal load applied on a group of type LINE, is applied only on
the first element of the group:
ELE GROUP $L5$ /PY=-25 XX=.25 UNTIL PY=-75 XX=.75 RELA
l If the line L5 contains elements 1 to 10, only element 1 is taken into

account.
Relative coordinates
RELATIVE : this label indicates that the distances x1 and x2 referred to above are expressed as
fractions of the length of the element.
In this case, x2 = 1 by default.
f. Initial strains
EX = εx defines the average initial longitudinal strain of the element, compulsorily expressed as a
component in the first local coordinate direction of the element.
In the special case of initial strain due to the effect of temperature, εx is given in terms of the
average temperature Tm of the element and coefficient of thermal expansion as follows:
εx = lx Tm
PSI = ψ Orientation of axes used to define loads.
LOCAL Indicates that the orientation is defined with respect to the local system of the element.
g. Transient analysis
FT = f Specifies the number of the table in which is defined the time function by which loads are
multiplied.
Computed Results
1. Displacements
UX, UY, RZ = components of displacement and rotation at all nodes, with respect to the global axes.
2. Reactions
FX, FY, CZ = components of reaction at rigidly constrained nodes, with respect to the global axes.

© 2019 ESI Group
3. Forces
NX, TY, MZ = axial load, shear force and bending moment, at each end of each element. These values
are expressed as components in the local coordinate system of the element.
Note:
l The signs of the values printed are such that they are the forces with which elements act on nodes.

© 2019 ESI Group
8.2.3 Grids
Elastic, static or dynamic analysis, linear or non-linear, of plane grid systems of beams loaded in
the direction perpendicular to their plane.
1. Reference Frame
Grids are defined in the (x,y) plane.
UZ = displacement in the direction z normal to the plane of the grid.
-RY = rotation about the y axis
RX = rotation about the x axis
(measured positive in the directions shown in Figure 8.2)
FZ = force in the z direction
-CY = moment about the y axis
CX = moment about the x axis
(measured positive in the directions shown in Figure 8.2)
4. Systems of Axes
coordinates of a beam, by an angle PSI.
Figure 8-2

© 2019 ESI Group
Input Data
OPTION GRIDS
2. Elements
Available elements are listed in the following table.
Number of Geometric
nodes form
1002 2 1
dimensional deflection equations.
X9XX any
precalculated.
One Special element the stiffness of
1602 2 1
dimensional which varies with displacements.
Not Not
X8XX Any Special user-supplied element.
Table 8.4
3. Material properties: Grids option
a. Axes
Physical properties of beams are defined with respect to their local systems of axes.
E=e Young's modulus
or
G=g Shear modulus, where G =E / (2 (1 + ν))
AZ = az Reduced cross sectional area (S/k) of the element, from which is computed shear
displacement. The constant k depends upon the geometric form of the section.
Example: k = 6/5 or 10/9 for a rectangle or circle respectively.
IX = ix Second moment of torsional inertia (i.e. torsional rigidity divided by shear modulus) about the x
axis.
IY = iy Second moment of bending inertia about the y axis.

© 2019 ESI Group
IG = ig Moment of polar inertia.

XX = xx Vector defining a rigid lever arm representing the eccentricity of the section centroid.
YY = yy
(XX, YY) is a vector from a point on the straight line joining the nodes to the centroid of a cross section
of the beam.
VY Extreme fiber distance to the axis of bending Oy along OZ+
VPY Extreme fiber distance to the axis of bending Oy along OZ-
These are parameters required in the calculation of extreme fiber stresses from computed
bending moments. They define the points at which stress is to be calculated with respect to the
neutral fiber, as illustrated below.
d. Thermoelasticity
Not applicable for this option.
e. Density
important.
ALPHA = α The damping matrix of each beam is computed according to the formula :
BETA= β [ci] = αi [Ki] + βi [Mi]

© 2019 ESI Group
VARIABLE = refers to table No. t which defines the behavior law, giving the equivalent stress σ as a
t function of the equivalent strain ε. This table must be type 1 if the relation σ-ε is independent
on temperature, or type 7 otherwise.
TABLE
t / 1 ε1, σ1, ε2, σ2, ...
or
TABLE
t / 7 θ1, f1, θ2, f2, ...
f1/ 1 ε1, σ1, ε2, σ2, ...
f2 / 1...
For the mean axial strain εm, the program calculates the stress σ (εm) corresponding to the
behavior law defined previously in the table, and then calculates the Young's modulus value :
Note:
= Eo
4. Constraints: Grids Option
UZ, RX, RY Constrained components of displacement and rotation.
applied to the degree of freedom RX with respect to the local axes associated with the
line)
ANTISYMMETRY
prescribed antisymmetry (corresponds to rigid constraint applied to the degrees of freedom UZ
and RY with respect to the local axes associated with the line)
KZ = kz Components of stiffness concentrated at nodes.
HX = hx
HY = hy

© 2019 ESI Group
VARIABLE = g if g > 0, then, for a non linear computation, table g defines the variation of components of
kz = kz0 . g(Uz)
hx = hx0 . g(Rx)
hy = hy0 . g(Ry)
if g < 0, then, table (-g) defines a vectorial function of several variables (see chapters 4.7
and 4.15).
KZ = kz, HX = hx, HY = hy
d. Axes
PSI = ψ Orientation of system of axes used.
kz, hx and hy are multiplied.
5. Applied Loads: Grids Option

GZ = gz Acceleration.
axes.
UZ = Uoz Components of imposed displacements
RX = Rox l of rigidly constrained nodes
RY = Roy l of elastically constrained nodes
(equation F = K (Uo - U))
VARIABLE = g with g < 0, then the table (-g) defines a vectorial function of several variables (see
Chapters 4.8 and 4.15), for the nodes only.

© 2019 ESI Group
FZ = fz Components of force and moment.

CX = cx
CY = cy
VARIABLE = g with g < 0, then table (-g) defines a vectorial function of several variables (see 4.8 and
4.15).
d. Uniformly distributed (uniform pressure) load over elements
PZ = pz Components of load per unit length of the element.

Concentrated loads
FZ = fz, XX = x
Trapezoidal loads
PZ = pz1, XX = x1, UNTIL PZ = pz2, XX = x2
x1 and x2 are the distances from the first node of the element to the beginning and end of the
trapezoidal load.
x1 and x2 are the distances from the first node of the element to the
beginning and end of the trapezoidal load.
Restrictions:
ELEMENT 18 19 /PZ=-25 XX=.25 UNTIL PZ=-75 XX=.75 RELATIVE
l Only element 18 is taken into account.
ELE GROUP $L5$ /PZ=-25 XX=.25 UNTIL PZ=-75 XX=.75
RELA
account.

© 2019 ESI Group
RELATIVEthis label indicates that the distances x1, and x2 referred to above are expressed as
fractions of the length of the element.
In this case, x2 = 1 by default.
f. Axes
LOCAL Indicates that the orientation is defined with respect to the local coordinate system of the
element.
multiplied.
Computed Results: Grids Option

1. Displacements
UZ, -RY, RX components of displacement and rotation at all nodes, with respect to the global axes,
according to the sign convention of fig. 8.2
2. Reactions
FZ, -CY, CZ components of reaction at rigidly constrained nodes, with respect to the global axes. The
sign convention is the same as that for UZ, RY, RX.

© 2019 ESI Group
3. Forces
TZ, MY, MX shear force, bending moment and torsional moment, at each end of each element.
These values are expressed as components in the local coordinate system of the element.
Note :

© 2019 ESI Group
8.2.4 Continuous Three Dimensional Frames

Linear or non-linear thermoelastic, static or dynamic analysis of three dimensional continuous
frames, members of which may be straight or curved. Curved members are taken to form an arc
of a circle.
The available material non-linearities are :
l non-linear elasticity in 1002 and 1402 elements,
l plasticity in 1402 elements.
1002, 1202 and 1402 elements can be used for small or large displacements.
The expression "curved member" is used to describe a circular, single arc member.
1. Reference Frame
Three dimensional continuous frames are defined in an (x, y, z) system.
UX, UY, UZ = displacements in the x, y and z directions.
RX, RY, RZ = rotations about the x, y and z axes.
FX, FY, FZ = forces in the x, y and z directions.
CX, CY, CZ = moments about the x, y and z axes.
Figure 8-3

© 2019 ESI Group
4. Systems of Axes
A rotation system of axes may be defined with respect to either the global coordinate system or
the local coordinate system of an element by the angles PSI, THETA and PHI.
Input Data
OPTION BEAMS
All straight elements are analyzed by the slope-deflection method.

Curved elements are analyzed by the flexibility matrix method, derived from Castigliano's
theorem.
2. Elements
Available elements are listed is the following table:
Number of Geometric
nodes form
Straight element which obeys
One
1002 2 1 slope deflection equations
dimensional
(small and large displacement).
One Cable, analyzed by large
1202 (2) 2 1
dimensional displacement formulation.
One Curved element, analyzed by
1302 (1) 2 1
dimensional flexibility matrix method.
One
1402 (2) 2 1 Curved or straight tube
dimensional
Special element the stiffness of
One
1602 2 1 which varies with
dimensional
displacements
One
1702 (1) 2 1 fluid- structure interaction
dimensional
between two coaxial cylinders.
Not Not
Not Not mass and damping matrices
X9XX Any
applicable applicable and load vectors of which are
precalculated
Table 8.4

© 2019 ESI Group
1. Elements which may be used only in linear analysis (not available for NON-LINEAR TRANSIENT
procedure).
2. Elements which may be used only in non-linear analysis (NON-LINEAR TRANSIENT procedure).
3. Material properties: Beams Option
a. Systems of axes
Physical properties of straight and curved beam elements must be defined in the local axes
with respect to the principal inertia axes of the section (crossing the center of gravity).
The center of gravity is considered to be the same as the center of torsion.
In particular for curved beams (type 1302) one of the XY principal inertia planes of the section
must be in the plane of the curved beam, and the local y axis must be directed towards the
center of the elbow. If a principal inertia plane is not in the plane of the elbow, a curved beam
cannot be used (use a straight beam).
Definition of the principal axes of inertia crossing the center of gravity:
Two possibilities are available:
l Define an angle PHI that rotates the beam yz local axes to the principal inertia axes.
l Define a third point located in the principal inertia plane (on the positive side of ) in
one of two ways :
o KX=x3 KY=y3 KZ=z3 (x3, y3, z3 coordinates of the third point)
or
o NODE = ni (ni = input number of an existing node in the mesh).
The third point definition has priority over PHI definition.
E=e Young's modulus
or
G=g Shear modulus, where G =E / (2 (1 + ν))

© 2019 ESI Group
c. Geometry of section: Beams option

The geometric properties of the section of 3D frames may be introduced:
l Manually (see below)
l Or read in a section database. For further information, please refer to the Beam Tool Manual.
Manual introduction of geometric properties

Parameters common for straight and curved elements
AX or S = s Cross sectional area, constant over the length of the element (mandatory).
AY = ay Reduced cross sectional area (S/k) of the element, from which is computed shear
displacements are computed. Ay reduced cross sectional area corresponding to the shear
force Ty.
AZ = az Az reduced cross sectional area corresponding to the shear force Tz
The constant K depends upon the geometric form of the section.
Example:
K=6/5 or 10/9 for a rectangle or a circle respectively.
By default, K=0 so shear displacement is ignored
IX = ix Second moment of torsional inertia (i.e. torsional rigidity divided by shear modulus) about the x
axis (mandatory).
IY = iy second moments of inertia about the Y and Z axes (Bending)
IZ = iz (mandatory)
IG = ig Moment of polar inertia.(By default IG = IY + IZ)
VY Extreme fiber distance to the axis of bending Oy along OZ+
VPY Extreme fiber distance to the axis of bending Oy along OZ-
VZ Extreme fiber distance to the axis of bending Oz along OY+
VPZ Extreme fiber distance to the axis of bending Oz along OY-
These are parameters required in the calculation of extreme fiber stresses from computed forces
and bending moments.
They define the points at which stress is to be calculated with respect to the neutral fiber as
illustrated below.

© 2019 ESI Group
Straight elements only (element type 1002)

XX = xx Vector defining a rigid lever arm representing the eccentricity of
YY = yy the section centroid
ZZ = zz With the NON-LINEAR TRANSIENT procedure, eccentricity must be constant in the
element. In other cases, if the rigid lever arm must be different between the nodes 1 and 2,
the syntax is:
l XX, YY, ZZ for the node 1
l EX, EY, EZ for the node 2.
(If EX = 0, by default EX = XX, and so for EY and EZ).
(XX, YY, ZZ) is a vector from a point on the straight line joining the nodes to the centroid
of a cross section of the beam in the principal inertia axes.
Example of Application:
An I-beam acting as stiffener of a plane structure (spatial shell) is modeled as follows:
For the computation to be a true reflection of the real structure the offset of the section centroid
with respect to the edge of the plate must be taken into account:

© 2019 ESI Group
Cable elements (element type 1202) (elements available in non-linear analysis only)
Input characteristics for this element are the following:
E=e Young's modulus
S=s constant section along the cable
It is necessary to introduce a low axial initial strain (cf. 8.2.4.3 § 5e).
Curved elements only (element type 1302) (elements available in linear analysis only)
R = rc rc > 0 Radius of curvature of the element (required)
The included angle in the element must be less than 180 degrees.
Local axes are defined by a PHI angle or by a third point. This 3rd point is located in the plane
of the elbow (on the side of the center relative to the chord).
If the beam section has any shape, section properties AX, AY, AZ, IX, IY, IZ are required.
If the beam section has a circular shape the only data needed are:
DIAM = diam outer diameter of the tube
H=h wall thickness
FLEX = fl flexibility coefficient of the elbow (fl greater than or equal to 1).
if fl = 1. flexibility of the elbow is neglected
if fl > 1. user flexibility is used
if fl = 0. (or label FLEX unused) flexibility is computed using ASME formula :
fl = (1.65 * rm**2) / (h * rc) where rm = 0.5*(d- h), mean radius of pipe
Curved tubes only (element type 1402)
A non linear beam element is available to modelize straight and curved tubes (element available
in NONLINEAR ANALYSIS only). Five mechanical behavior models are available and are
characterized by their formulation:
l SHAPE = 0 ; tube element for SYSTUS versions prior to version 2000.
l SHAPE = 20 or 21 ; tube element with global behavior model and transverse shear.
l SHAPE = 30 ; tube element with local behavior model and transverse shear.

© 2019 ESI Group
l SHAPE = 40 or 41 ; tube element with global behavior model and without transverse shear.
l SHAPE = 50 ; tube element with local behavior model and without transverse shear.
Geometry properties for these models are the following:
DIAM = diam outer diameter of the tube
H=h wall thickness
R = rc radius of curvature of the tube (by default straight tube). In absence of R or R=0, do not use
the label SHAPE.
In addition to the previous properties, the global model uses the section values, inertia values,
flexibility coefficients for curved tubes:
FLEX = fl Flexibility coefficient for curved tube. It is defined by the user. By default, SYSTUS
computes it according to the ASME code
where is the mean radius of the tube.
It is pressure independent if the class of the tube is 0.

C = 0, if PCA = 0
, else
where
p: internal pressure
E: Young modulus.
PCA = pca Class of the tube as defined in the ASME code (pca = 0, 1 ou 2). See label FLEX.
PRESSURE = p internal pressure (used in flexibility coefficient if pca ≠ 0 and in plasticity criterion for any
class)
If p > 0, p is the applied pressure.
If p < 0, the table (-p) gives the variation of the pressure function of time.
Local models use the geometry properties previously defined and the label PRESSURE to
specify the internal pressure, then defines several computation points (or stations) by dividing
regularly the section (label INTE).
Numerical integration
For global models (SHAPE = 20, 21, 40 or 41):
INTE = 1 or 2 Define the number of Gauss integration points along beam x-axis. The recommended value
for elements with transverse shear (SHAPE = 20 or 21) is the default value '1'. The
recommended value for elements without transverse shear (SHAPE = 40 or 41) is '2'.
For local models (SHAPE = 30 or 50):

© 2019 ESI Group
INTE = c i r n g Unit number is the number of Gauss points along beam x-axis.
g = 1 or 2. The recommended value for elements with transverse shear (SHAPE = 30) is '1'.
The recommended value for elements without transverse shear (SHAPE = 50) is '2'.
If g = 0, SYSTUS imposes g = 1.
Hundred number defines the radial subdivision by imposing the number of integration points
through the thickness of the tube, r = 3 or 5, points are located in the thickness:
Thousand and ten of thousands number define the circumferential subdivision of the section
by imposing the number of integration points along the circumference. 'ci' is an even value
from '04' to '36'. Points are located from 0 to 360 degrees with a regular interval equal to
.
The ten number defines the number of harmonics used to modelize the curved tube
ovalization. n varies from 1 to 7. If the tube is straight, n = 0.
d. Thermoelasticity
For elements 1402 with SHAPE =20, 21, 30, 40, 41, 50, LX can be temperature dependent:
LX =-t t number of the table that defines the temperature dependent material properties.
e. Density
important.
For straight elements only.
ALPHA = α For element i, the damping matrix is computed according to :
BETA= β [ci] = αi [Ki] + βi [Mi]

© 2019 ESI Group
VARIABLE = t refers to table No. t which defines the behavior law, giving the equivalent stress σ as a
function of the equivalent strain ε.
This table must be type 1 if the relation σ-ε is independent on temperature, or type 7
otherwise.
TABLE
t / 1 ε1, σ1, ε2, σ2, ...
or
TABLE
t / 7 θ1, f1, θ2, f2, ...
f1/ 1 ε1, σ1, ε2, σ2, ...
f2 / 1...
For the mean axial strain εm, the program calculates the stress σ (εm) corresponding to the
behavior law defined previously in the table, and then calculates the Young's modulus value:
Note:
= Eo
h. Plasticity
For tubes only. For more details, see Chapter 17: Plasticity.
4. Constraints: Beams Option
UX, RX, Constrained components of displacement and rotation.
UY, RY
UZ, RZ
When rigid constraint is defined on a line or a plane (see 4.7.2), the labels above may be
replaced by the following labels:
Case of a line:
applied to the degree of freedom UY, UZ, RX, RY and RZ with respect to the local axes
associated with the line)
ANTISYMMETRY prescribed antisymmetry (corresponds to rigid constraint applied to the degrees of freedom UX
with respect to the local axes associated with the line)
Case of a plane:

© 2019 ESI Group
SYMMETRY prescribed symmetry with respect to the defined plane (corresponds to rigid constraint
applied to the degrees of freedom UZ, RX and RY with respect to the local axes
associated with the plane)
ANTISYMMETRY prescribed antisymmetry (corresponds to rigid constraint applied to the degrees of
freedom UX, UY and RZ with respect to the local axes associated with the plane)
KX = kx
KY = ky
KZ = kz
Components of stiffness concentrated at nodes
HX = hx
HY = hy
HZ = hz
VARIABLE = g if g > 0, then, for a non linear computation, table g defines the
variation of components of stiffness with the node displacements,
following the general form :
kx = kx0 . g(Ux)
ky = ky0 . g(Uy)
kx = kz0. g(Uz)
hx = hx0. g (Rx)
hy = hy0. g (Ry)
hz = hz0. g (Rz)
if g < 0, then, table (-g) defines a vectorial function of several
variables (see chapters 4.7 and 4.15).
c. Elastic constraints distributed over elements (straight elements only)
KX = kx, KY = ky, KZ = kz
HX = hx, HY = hy, HZ = hz
d. System of axes
PSI = ψ
THETA = θ Orientation of axes used
PHI = φ
LOCAL The orientation is specified with respect to the local system of the
element. (For elastic constraints distributed over elements only).
are multiplied.

© 2019 ESI Group
5. Applied loads: Beams Option

GY = gy
GZ = gz
axes
THETA = θ.
PHI = ϕ
CENTRIFUGAL (C or VELOCITY ω) ACCEL ω' PNT1...
Besides the ordinary parameters associated with the key-word CENTRIFUGAL (see
4.8.2), it is possible in the case of beams 1002 (and for the isolated masses) :
l to define the centrifugal force by the angular velocity in rad/sec (VELOC = ω) or by C = ω2
such as
l to define a tangential force owing to the derivative of the velocity of rotation with regard to
time : ACCE = ω'
such that
with
= Unitary vector of the axis of rotation
P1 = A point on the axis of rotation
G = Center of the element (or point with mass)
UX = Uox Components of imposed displacement
UY = Uoy l of rigidity constrained nodes
UZ = Uoz l of elastically constrained nodes
RX = Rox (equation F = K (Uo – U))
RY = Roy l of elastically constrained elements
RZ = Roz
VARIABLE = g with g < 0, then the table (-g) defines a vectorial function of several
variables (see 4.8 and 4.15), for the nodes only.
c. Forces concentrated at node

© 2019 ESI Group
FX = cx
FY = cy
FZ = cz
Components of force
CX = cx
CY = cy
HZ = cz
variables (see 4.8 and 4.15).
d. Loads applied to beam elements (elements 1002, 1202 and 1402, SHAPE = 20, 21, 30,
40, 41 or 50)
Concentrated loads
A concentrated load can be applied to any point of the element. For large displacements its
direction can be 'CONSERVATIVE' (fixed direction in a fixed reference frame) or 'follower'
(fixed direction with respect to the new reference frame of the deformed element).
FX = fx, FY = fy, FZ = fz, XX = x, (CONSERVATIVE)
where x is the distance of the point of application of the load from the first node of the element
in the local reference frame.
If the label CONSERVATIVE is not specified the concentrated load is of follower type.
Uniform external pressure

PX = px
PY = py
For large displacements its direction can be 'CONSERVATIVE' or 'follower'.
PZ = pz
Variable external pressure
A external pressure can be applied to element. It can be distributed uniformaly or in a
trapezoidal form. For large displacements its direction can be 'CONSERVATIVE' or 'follower'.
If the label CONSERVATIVE is not specified the pressure load is of follower type.
PX = px1, PY = py1, PZ = pz1, XX = x1, UNTIL
PX = px2, PY = py2, PZ = pz2, XX = x2
trapezoidal load.
By default, x2 is the length of the element

© 2019 ESI Group
Restrictions:
ELEMENT 18 19 /PZ=-25 XX=.25 UNTIL PZ=-75 XX=.75
RELATIVE Only element 18 is taken into account.
ELE GROUP $L5$ /PZ=-25 XX=.25 UNTIL PZ=-75 XX=.75 RELA
account.
Space-time external pressure loads (element 1002 only)
PX = px Components of load per unit length of the element.
PY = py
PZ = pz
VARIABLE = g with g < 0, then the table (-g) defines a vectorial function of several variables (see 4.8 and
4.15).
Internal pressure loads (element 1402 only)
A internal pressure can be applied to element using the label PRESSURE when defining the
material properties (see Paragraph 3) Material properties.
Space-time internal pressure loads (element 1402 only)
An internal pressure variable in space and time can be applied to tube line. It is defined by
successive elements or a TRAJECTORY. Any section of the line is identified by its curvilinear
abscissa 's'. The pressure is defined by a space-time function p(s,t).
The command MEDIUM TRAJECTORY (cf. Chap. 8.11.4 ) defines the group of tube
elements. The command LOAD applied to the MEDIUM gives the table which programs the
variation of the internal pressure function of the curvilinear abscissa and time, according to the
SYSTUS rules.
RELATIVE : this label indicates that the distances x1, and x2 referred to above are expressed as
fractions of the length of the element. In this case, x2 = 1 by default.
e. Initial strains
Elements 1002, 1202 and 1402 (SHAPE = 20, 21, 30, 40, 41 or 50)
EX = εx Defines the average initial longitudinal strain of the element, compulsorily expressed as a
component in the first local reference frame direction of the element.
Elements 1002 and 1402 (SHAPE = 20, 21, 30, 40, 41 or 50)
DY = χy Defines the initial bending strain (curvature) of the element, compulsorily
DZ = χ z expressed as a component in the local reference frame of the element.

© 2019 ESI Group
Notes:
l For the special case of cables subjected to large displacements, it is necessary to apply an initial
strain, as weak as possible, to ensure the initial stability of the structure.
l In the special case of initial strain due to the effect of temperature, εx is given in terms of the
average temperature Tm of the element and coefficient of thermal expansion as follows :
εx = lx. Tm
l In the calculation of thermal strain of curved elements, temperature is taken to vary linearly
between the nodes.
f. Temperature or thermal gradient in an element (elements 1002 and 1402, SHAPE = 20,
21, 30, 40, 41 or 50)
The beam elements can be associated with:
l an average temperature temp
TEMP = temp FMT = fmt
associated with a time function fmt
l a thermal gradient along every principal axe of inertia :
GRY = gry FGRY = fgry GRZ = grz FGRZ = fgrz

associated with a time function (GRY = (Ts - Ti) / hy where
Ts = temperature on surface Ysup.
Ti = temperature on surface Yinf.
hy = distance between the upper surface and the lower surface.)
Do not use the option THERMOELASTIC in this case.
h. System of axes
PSI = ψ Orientation of axes used to define loads
THETA = θ
PHI= ϕ
LOCAL Indicates that the orientation is defined with respect to the local system of the straight element.
i. Transient analysis
multiplied.

© 2019 ESI Group
Computed Results: Beams Option

1. Displacements
UX, RX
UY, RY components of displacement and rotation at all nodes, with respect to the global axes.
UZ, RZ
2. Reactions
FX, CX
FY, CY components of reaction at rigidly constrained nodes, with respect to the global axes.
FZ, CZ
3. Forces
a. Straight elements
NX axial load
TY shear forces
TZ
MX torsional moment
MY bending moments
MZ
Nodal values are expressed as
components in the principal inertia axes
of the straight element.
b. Curved elements
Forces are expressed as components in tangential principal inertia axes at the ends of the
element.
NX axial load
TY shear forces
TZ
MX torsional moment
MY bending moments
MZ
Note:

© 2019 ESI Group
8.2.5 Plane Pin-Jointed Frames

Thermoelastic, static or dynamic analysis without damping of pin-jointed plane frames loaded in
their plane. The pin-jointed members are subjected to axial load only (no bending or torsion).
1. Reference Frame
Pin-jointed plane frames are defined in the (x, y) plane.
UX = displacement in the x direction.
UY = displacement in the y direction.
FX = force in the x direction.
FY = force in the y direction.
4. Systems of Axes
A rotated system of axes may be defined with respect to either the global coordinate system or
the local coordinate system of a member by an angle PSI.
Figure 8-4
Input Data
OPTION PLANE TRUSS

© 2019 ESI Group
2. Elements
Available elements are listed is the following table.
Number of Geometric
nodes form
One
1002 2 1 Standard pin-jointed element.
dimensional
X9XX Any
precalculated.
Table 8.5
3. Material Properties: Plane Truss Option
a.System of axes
Physical properties of pin- jointed elements are defined with respect to the local axes of
elements.
E=e Young's modulus
d. Thermoelasticity
e. Density
4. Constraints: Plane Truss Option
UX, UY Constrained components of displacement.
applied to the degree of freedom UY with respect to the local axes associated with the
line)
ANTISYMMETRY prescribed antisymmetry (corresponds to rigid constraint applied to the degree of freedom UX
b.Elastic constraints at nodes

© 2019 ESI Group
KX = kx Components of stiffness concentrated at nodes.

KY = ky
VARIABLE = g if g > 0, then, for a non linear calculation, the table g defines the variation of components of
stiffness with the node displacements, following the general form:
kx = kx0 . g(Ux)
ky = ky0 . g(Uy)
if g < 0, then, table (-g) defines a vectorial function of several variables (see 4.7 and 4.15).
KX = kx, KY = ky Components of stiffness uniformly distributed over elements.
d. Axes
5. Applied Loads: Plane Truss Option
GX = gx Components of acceleration .
GY = gy
axes.
l of elastically constrained nodes
(equation F = K (Uo – U))

© 2019 ESI Group

FZ = fz Components of force.
FY = fy
d. Uniformly distributed load (uniform pressures) over elements
PX = px
PY = py
Concentrated loads
FX = fx, FY = fy, XX = x
Trapezoidal loads
PX = px1, PY = py1, XX = x1, UNTIL PX = px2, PY = py2, XX = x2
trapezoidal load.
Restrictions:
ELEMENT 18 19 /PY=-25 XX=.25 UNTIL PY=-75 XX=.75
RELATIVE
Only element 18 is taken into account.
ELE GROUP $L5$ /PY=-25 XX=.25 UNTIL PY=-75 XX=.75
RELA
account.

© 2019 ESI Group
f. Initial strains
EX = εx EX = εx Defines the average initial longitudinal strain of the element, compulsorily
expressed as a component in the first local coordinate direction of the element.
In the special case of initial strain due to the effect of temperature, εx is given in terms of
the average temperature Tm of the element and coefficient of thermal expansion as
follows :
εx = lx. Tm
g. System of axes
element.
Computed Results: Plane Truss Option

1. Displacements
UX, UY Components of displacement at all nodes, with respect to the global axes.
2. Reactions
FX, FY Components of reaction at rigidly constrained nodes, with respect to the global axes.
3. Forces
NX axial load at each end of each element, expressed as the component in the first local
direction of the element.
Note:

© 2019 ESI Group
8.2.6 Three Dimensional Pin-Jointed Frames

Thermoelastic, static or dynamic analysis of three dimensional pin-jointed frames.
The pin-jointed members are subjected to axial load only (no bending or torsion).
1. Reference Frame
Three dimensional pin-jointed frames are defined in (x, y, z) space.
UX, UY, UZ = displacements in the x, y and z directions.
FX, FY, FZ = forces in the x, y and z directions.
Figure 8-5
4. Systems of Axes
coordinates of an element by the angles PSI, THETA and PHI.

© 2019 ESI Group
Input Data
OPTION TRUSS
2. Elements
Number of Geometric
nodes form
One
1002 2 1 Standard pin-jointed element.
dimensional
X9XX Any
precalculated.
Table 8.6
3. Material Properties: Truss Option
a. System of axes
Physical properties of pin-jointed elements are defined with respect to local axes of elements.
E=e Young's modulus
d. Thermoelasticity
e. Density
4. Constraints: Truss Option
UX, UY, UZ Constrained components of displacement.

© 2019 ESI Group
Case of a line:
SYMMETRY prescribed symmetry with respect to the defined line (corresponds to rigid constraint applied to
the degrees of freedom UY and UZ with respect to the local axes associated with the line)
Case of a plane:
SYMMETRY prescribed symmetry with respect to the defined plane (corresponds to rigid constraint applied
to the degree of freedom UZ with respect to the local axes associated with the plane)
ANTISYMMETRY prescribed antisymmetry (corresponds to rigid constraint applied to the degrees of freedom UX
and UY with respect to the local axes associated with the plane)
KY = ky
KZ = kz
VARIABLE = g if g > 0, then, for a non linear calculation, the table g defines the variation of components of
stiffness with the node displacements, following the general form:
kx = kx0 . g(Ux)
ky = ky0 . g(Uy)
kz = kz0 . g(Rz)
KX = kx,
KY = ky Components of stiffness uniformly distributed over elements.
KZ = kz
d. Axes
THETA = θ
PHI = ϕ

© 2019 ESI Group
5. Applied Loads: Truss Option

GX = gx Components of acceleration .
GY = gy
GZ = gz
axes.
THETA = θ
PHI = ϕ
UZ = Uoz l of elastically constrained nodes
(equation F = K (Uo – U))
FX = fx Components of force.
FZ = fz
FY = fy
d. Uniformly distributed load (uniform pressures) over elements
PX = px
PY = py Components of load per unit length of the element.
PZ = pz

© 2019 ESI Group
e. Loads applied to pin-jointed elements

Concentrated loads
FX = fx, FY = fy, FZ = fz, XX = x
Trapezoidal loads
PX = px1, PY = py1, PZ = pz1, XX = x1, UNTIL PX = px2, PY = py2, PZ = pz2, XX = x2

trapezoidal load.
Restrictions:
ELEMENT 18 19 /PZ=-25 XX=.25 UNTIL PZ=-75 XX=.75 RELATIVE
Only element 18 is taken into account.
ELE GROUP $L5$ /PZ=-25 XX=.25 UNTIL PZ=-75 XX=.75
RELA
account.
f. Initial strains
EX = εx EX = εx Defines the average initial longitudinal strain of the element, compulsorily
expressed as a component in the first local coordinate direction of the element.
In the special case of initial strain due to the effect of temperature, εx is given in terms of
the average temperature Tm of the element and coefficient of thermal expansion as
follows :
εx = lx. Tm

© 2019 ESI Group
g. System of axes
THETA = θ
PSI = ψ
element.
Computed Results: Truss Option

1. Displacements
UX, UY, UZ Components of displacement at all nodes, with respect to the global axes.
UX, UYComponents of displacement at all nodes, with respect to the global axes.
2. Reactions
FX, FY, FZ Components of reaction at rigidly constrained nodes, with respect to the global axes.
3. Forces
NX axial load at each end of each element, expressed as the component in the first local
direction of the element.
Note:

© 2019 ESI Group
8.3 Plates and Shells
8.3 PLATES AND SHELLS

Structures considered under the heading plates and shells are those represented mainly by two
dimensional elements, the finite element analysis being carried out in accordance with the
theory of plates and shells.
Stress and strain are taken to vary linearly through the thickness of the elements, an assumption
which is very nearly correct in the case of thin plates and shells subject to small displacements.
Thin shells are regarded as assemblies of flat plates.
8.3.1 Plates
Linear elastic, static or dynamic analysis of thin plates subjected to bending only.
This analysis option is not available with the NON-LINEAR TRANSIENT procedure.
1. Reference Frame
Plates are defined in an (x, y) plane. The position of a node is therefore defined by its global
cartesian coordinates x and y.
UZ = displacement in the z direction.
- RY = rotation about the y axis.
RX = rotation about the x axis.
FZ = force perpendicular to the plane of the plate, i.e in the z direction.
- CY = moment about the y axis.
CX = moment about the x axis.

© 2019 ESI Group
4. Systems of Axes
the local coordinate system of an element by an angle ψ as follows :
PSI = ψ
Input Data
1. Type of structure
OPTION PLATE
2. Elements
Number of Geometric
nodes form
1002 2 1
dimensional deflection equations (see grid)
2003 3 Triangle 2 Plate
2004 4 Quadrangle 2 Plate
One
dimensional
displacements
Not Not

© 2019 ESI Group

X9XX Any
precalculated
3. Material Properties: Plate Option
a. System of axes
Physical properties of elements are always defined with respect to their local axes.
E=e Young's modulus

© 2019 ESI Group
c. Anisotropic material
TABLE = t specifies the number of the table, defined elsewhere by the routine TABLE, which defines six
components of a symmetric matrix D relating forces to curvatures χx,χxy, χy.
The curvatures are given by the equations:
where w is the normal displacement.

In the case of an isotropic material the matrix D has the following form :
The components of the matrix D shown above must be given in the following order:
TABLE
t /D11 D12 D13 D22 D23 D33
d. Geometry of section
H=h Thickness of plate.
e. Density
4. Constraints: Plate Option
UZ, RX, RY Constrained components of displacement and rotation.
When rigid constraint is defined on a line (see 4.7.2), the labels above may be replaced by the
following labels:
applied to the degree of freedom RX with respect to the local axes associated with the
line)
ANTISYMMETRY prescribed antisymmetry (corresponds to rigid constraint applied to the degrees of freedom UZ
and RY with respect to the local axes associated with the line)

© 2019 ESI Group

KZ = kz
HX = hx Components of stiffness concentrated at nodes.
HY = hy
These correspond to the equations:
FZ = -kz (Uz - Uoz)
CX = -hx (Rx - Rox)
CY = -hy (Ry - Roy)
KZ = kz Components of stiffness uniformly distributed over elements.
d. Transient analysis
FT = f Specifies the number of the table in which is defined the time function by which the stiffnesses kz,
hx and hy are multiplied.
5. Applied Loads: Plate Option
SW Dead load of the structure.In this case the value defined by RHO is taken to be a specific weight
(g.ρ).
GZ = gz Components of acceleration.
UZ = Uoz Components of imposed displacements
RX = Rox l of rigidly constrained nodes
RY = Roy l of elastically constrained nodes (equation F = K ( Uo - U))
FZ = fz Components of force and moment
CX = cx
CY = cy
variables (see chapters 4.8 and 4.15) for the nodes only.
d. Uniformly distributed load over elements
PZ = pz Components of load per unit length of the element.

© 2019 ESI Group
e. Initial strains
DX = dx
Curvatures, sagging considered positive.
DY = dy
f. Transient analysis
Specifies the number of the table in which is defined the time function by which loads are
FT = f
multiplied.
Computed Results: Plate Option

1. Displacements
UZ, -RY, RX components of displacement and rotation at all nodes, with respect to the global axes.
2. Reactions
FZ, -CY, CX components of reaction at rigidly constrained nodes, with respect to the global axes.
3. Forces
MX, MXY, Bending and torsional moment at the center of each element, expressed as components in the
MY local coordinate system of the element.
Note:
l Forces are not labeled with respect to the axes along which they are defined but with respect to
the stress tensor components which generate them.

© 2019 ESI Group
8.3.2 Axisymmetric Shells

Linear thermoelastic analysis of thin shells both the geometry and loading of which are
axisymmetric.
Note:
l Bars are only subjected to tensile and compressive loads (no bending or torsion).
1. Reference Frame
Structures with axial symmetry are defined by their cross section in the plane (x, y), the y axis
being the axis of symmetry.
RZ = rotation about the z axis.
CZ = moment about the z axis.
4. Systems of Axes
the local coordinate system of an element by the angles ψ as follows :
PSI = ψ

© 2019 ESI Group
Input Data
OPTION AXISYMMETRIC or TRANSLATION SHELL
2. Elements
Number of Geometric
nodes form
0001 1 Point 0 Cross-section of bar
One
1002 2 1 Cross-section of shell
dimensional
One
dimensional
displacement
Not Not
X9XX Any
precalculated
3. Material and Section Properties: Axisymmetric or Translation Shell Option
a. System of axes
Physical properties of elements are always defined with respect to their local axes.
E=e Young's modulus
TABLE = t specifies the number of the table, defined elsewhere by the routine TABLE, which defines
ten components of a symmetric matrix D relating forcesσ to strains ε
σ = Dε
The numbers above show the order in which the components of D must be defined :

© 2019 ESI Group
TABLE
t/ D11, D12, D13, D14, D22, D23, D24, D33, D34, D44
It should be noted that this matrix may be simplified by an appropriate choice of axes.
Note:
l In the case of bars, D is a diagonal matrix but all terms including zero coefficients must still be
given:
d. Geometry of section
Section geometry does not vary in the z (or circumferential) direction.
Bars
AX or S = s Cross sectional area of the bar.
Shells
H=h Thickness of plate.
e. Thermoelasticity
LX = lx
Coefficient of thermal expansion
LZ = lz
f. Density
g. Non linear elasticity
VARIABLE = t refers to the table number t which defines the behavior law, giving the equivalent stress σ as
a function of the equivalent strain ε.
This table must be type 1 if the relation σ-ε is independent from temperature, or type 7
otherwise:
TABLE
t / 1 ε1, σ1, ε2, σ2, ...

© 2019 ESI Group
or
TABLE
t / 7 θ1, f1, θ2, f2, ...
f1/ 1 ε1, σ1, ε2, σ2, ...
f2 / 1...
The non linear elastic model for the shell is a layered model.
The label:
INTEG = i
defines the number of integration points and the number of layers in the thickness.
i takes the form :
i = 100 . s + p
s : number of layers (1, 3, 5, 7 or 9)
: number of integration points (1 or 3).
The default value is 903 (9 layers, 3 integration points)
Note:
= E 0.
4. Constraints: Axisymmetric or Translation Shell Option
a. Rigid constraints at node
UX, UY, RZ Constrained components of displacement and rotation.
following labels:
with the line)
AXISYMMETRY prescribed axisymmetry (corresponds to rigid constraint applied to the degree of freedom
UX) in AXISYMMETRIC SHELL option. In this case the line defined must be Oy axis.

© 2019 ESI Group

KY = ky
HZ = hz
VARIABLE = g if g > 0, then, for a non linear calculation, table g defines the variation of components of
kx = kx0 . g(Ux)
ky = ky0 . g(Uy)
hz = hz0 . g(Rz)
Stiffnesses are specified for a sector subtending one radian at the axis for elastic constraints at
nodes.
KX = kx
KY = ky Components of stiffness uniformly distributed over elements.
HZ = hz
Stiffnesses are specified for a sector subtending one radian at the axis for elastic constraints
distributed over elements. The label UNIT may be used to specify that they are given for unit
distance in the circumferential direction instead. These values are then multiplied by the
program by the radius R to obtain the value for one radian.
d. System of axes
PSI = ψ Orientation of axes used (by defaults, with respect to the global axes).
LOCAL Indicates that axes used are defined with respect to the local coordinate system of an element
(elastic constraints distributed over elements only).
FT = f Specifies the number or the table in which is defined the time function by which the
stiffnesses kx, ky and hz are multiplied.
5. Applied Loads: Axisymmetric or Translation Shell Option
GY = gy
axes.
THERMAL i Thermoelastic analysis with temperature distribution defined by temperature cards i and i +
1.

© 2019 ESI Group
In the case of thermoelastic analysis, the label THERMOELASTICITY must appear in the
OPTION command.
Temperature card i gives the temperature on the middle surface at each node, and card i + 1
gives the temperature gradient through the thickness of the shell, which is
where
T(+) is the temperature of the upper surface
T(-) is the temperature of the lower surface.
RZ = Roz
l of elastically constrained nodes (equation F = K ( Uo - U))
VARIABLE = g with g < 0, the table (-g) defines a vectorial function of several
variables (see 4.8 and 4.15) for nodes only.
FX = fx Components of force and moment.
FY = fy
CZ = cz
VARIABLE = g with g < 0, the table (-g) defines a vectorial function of several
Case of axisymmetric structures:
Forces are specified for a sector subtending one radian at the axis. The label UNIT may be used
to specify that they are given for unit distance in the circumferential direction instead. These
values are then multiplied by the program by the radius R to obtain the value for one radian.
Value entered
Physical data
with UNIT without UNIT
Global force = F F
d. Uniformly distributed load over elements - Pressure

PX = px Components of pressure (always defined per unit of distance in the circumferential direction).
PY = py

© 2019 ESI Group
e. Initial strains
EX = εx Longitudinal strains.
Ey = εy
In the special case of initial strain due to the effect of temperature, εx and εy are given in terms
of the average temperature Tm of the element and coefficients of thermal expansion as follows:
εx = lx. Tm
εy = ly. Tm
f. System of axes
PSI = ψ Orientation of axes used in the definition of loads.
LOCAL The orientation is defined with respect to the local coordinate system of the element.
FT = f Specifies the number of the table in which is defined the time function by which applied
loads are multiplied.
Computed Results: Axisymmetric or Translation Shell Option

1. Displacements
UX, UY, RZ Components of displacement and rotation at all nodes, with respect to the global axes.
2. Reactions
FX, FY, CZ Components of reaction at rigidly constrained nodes, with respect to the global axes.
3. Forces
NX, NZ Longitudinal and circumferential membrane forces.
MX, MZ Longitudinal and circumferential bending moments.
These forces are calculated at the centers of elements and expressed as components in the local
coordinate system of each element.
Longitudinal forces and moments are those acting on a cross-section of unit length in the
circumferential direction.
Notes:
l For bars, the only force is NZ.
l Forces are not labeled with respect to the axes along which they are defined but with respect to
the stress tensor components which they generate.

© 2019 ESI Group
8.3.3 General Shells

Thermoelastic, static or dynamic analysis of thin or thick shells of arbitrary geometric form.
The available material non-linearities are:
l non linear elasticity in beams (1002 elements), and 2003, 2403, 2404, 2406 and 2408 shell
elements,
l plasticity and viscoplasticity in 2003, 2403, 2404, 2406 and 2408 shell elements,
l plasticity only in 1402 pipe elements,
l user behavior law for 2003, 2403, 2404, 2406 and 2408 shell elements.
l 1002, 1202, 1402, 2003, 2403, 2404, 2406 and 2408 elements can also be used for small and
large displacement formulation.
Note:
l The finite element formulation adopted in SYSTUS is such that rotation about the direction normal
to an element at a node does not give rise to any stresses, the energy associated with such rotation
being negligible compared with that associated with other degrees of freedom.
1. Reference Frame
Thin shells of arbitrary geometric form are defined in (x, y, z) space.
RX = rotation about the x axis.
RY = rotation about the y axis.
FZ = force in the z direction.
CX = moment about the x axis.
CY = moment about the y axis.

© 2019 ESI Group
4. Systems of Axes
the local coordinate system of an element by the angles PSI, THETA and PHI.
Input Data
OPTION SHELL
2. Elements
Number Geometric
of nodes form
Straight element that obeys the
One
1002 2 1 slope deflection equation (see
dimensional
section 8.2.4).
One Cable, analyzed by large
1202** 2 1
dimensional displacement formulation.
Curved element, analyzed by
One
1302* 2 1 flexibility matrix method (see
dimensional
section 8.2.4).
One
1402** 2 1 Straight tube (see section 8.2.4).
dimensional

© 2019 ESI Group
Number Geometric
of nodes form
Not
1702* 2 1 fluid structure interaction between
applicable
two coaxial cylinders.
2003 3 Triangle 2 Thin shell element
2004* 4 Quadrangle 2 Thin shell element
Thin shell element with DKT
2203* 3 Triangle 2
formulation for bending.
Thin shell element with DKQ
formulation for bending and
2204* 4 Quadrangle 2
incompatible modes for
membrane.
2403
3 Triangle 2 Thin or thick shell element
SHAPE 2
2404
4 Quadrangle 2 Thin or thick shell element
SHAPE2
2406
6 Triangle 2 Thin or thick shell element
SHAPE 2
2408
8 Quadrangle 2 Thin or thick shell element
SHAPE 2
2403 Thin or thick shell element with
3 Triangle 2
SHAPE 1 an old internal formulation
2404 Thin or thick shell element with
4 Quadrangle 2
SHAPE 1 an old internal formulation
Pressure loading element
1n03* 3 One 1 dimensional compatible with
2006 and 2008 shell elements.
2n06* 6 Triangle 2 Thick shell element
2n08* 8 Quadrangle 2 Thick shell element
One Special element, the stiffness of
1602 2 1
dimensional which varies with displacement.
Not Not
Special element, the stiffness,
X9XX Any
precalculated.
*Elements which may be used only in linear analysis (not available with NON-LINEAR
TRANSIENT procedure)

© 2019 ESI Group
**Elements which may be used only in non-linear analysis (NON-LINEAR TRANSIENT

procedure)
Different types of shell element
There are 5 different families of shell element:
l 2003-2004 family (isotropic or laminated thin shell)
l 2203-2204 family (isotropic thin shell)
l 240X SHAPE 2 family
l 2403-2404 SHAPE1 family
l 2n06-2n08 family (isotropic or laminated thick shell)
2003-2004
The 2003 basic shell element has linear membrane displacements and cubic bending
displacements. For laminated shells, coupled membrane and bending displacement is available.
The 2004 shell element is computed by superimposing two 2003 elements. These two basic
elements involve low computation costs, but are too stiff for in-plane bending if the mesh is
coarse.
This family of thin shell elements possesses the following set of functions:
l small displacement, and also large displacement and large rotation (2003 only), but not large
strains,
l isotropic, anisotropic and laminated elastic behavior law (linear only),
l non-linear elastic behavior law (2003 only),
l global elastoplastic behavior model (2003 only),
l layered elastoplastic behavior models (2003 only),
l layered elastoviscoplastic behavior models (2003 only),
l integration of dead load,
l integration of centrifugal force (linear only),
l integration of initial and thermal strains,
l integration of distributed elastic constraints,
l integration of pressures applied to the middle surface.
The 2003 basic element can be used with all SYSTUS solution procedures. The 2004 element
can only be used with linear analysis procedure.
2203-2204 family
This thin shell element family possesses the following functions:
l isotropic elastic behavior law,
l integration of dead load and centrifugal force,
l integration of pressures applied to the middle surface.
These elements which may be used only in linear analysis.

240X SHAPE >2 family (default)

© 2019 ESI Group
These elements are an actual formulation of the shell elements. When SHAPE is not explicitly
given, these elements are used by default. For the 2403 and 2404 elements, they have a linear
formulation for the membrane, bending and shear displacement. The 2406 and 2408 have a
quadratic formulation for the membrane, bending and shear displacement.
These elements possess the following functions:
l integration of transverse shear forces,
l small displacement, and also large displacement and large rotation, but not large strains,
l isotropic or anisotropic behavior law,
l non-linear elastic behavior law,
l global elastoplastic behavior model (thin shell only),
l layered elastoplastic behavior models,
l layered elastoviscoplastic behavior models,
l variable thickness and eccentricity in the element,
l integration of pressures, which can be applied to a surface offset from the surface modeled,
variable in space and time, with over-integration where appropriate, for dealing with
pressures applied only partially to the shell surface,
l Isolated force and moment inside the element.
These elements can be used with linear or non linear procedures.
For non- linear thermo- mechanical computation, these elements are interfaced with
corresponding code thermal shell elements of the THERMAL ENTHALPY option (see
Chapter 6 of the Heat Transfer Reference manual).
Notes:
l The use of element 2406 with larges rotations may leads to shear blocking problem. It is
recommended to use them only for joint quadrangle meshes.
l The use of these shell elements is forbidden in the old data structure.

© 2019 ESI Group
2403-2404 SHAPE 1 family

These elements are the old historical shell element of SYTUS. They use a non linear
formulation only for membrane strain.
The 2403 element has linear membrane displacements. This simple, low cost element can be
used for modeling either thin shell or thick shell problems, but does require a relatively fine
mesh to reproduce bending phenomena in the shell plane.
The 2404 element has linear membrane displacements. This element can be used for modeling
either thin shell or thick shell elements with curvature.
2006-2008 family
This thick shell element family is specially dedicated to laminated composite shells, and
possesses the following functions:
l integration of transverse shear forces,
l isotropic, anisotropic or laminated elastic behavior,
l thickness variable in the element,
l integration of pressures, which can be applied to a surface offset from the surface modeled,
variable in space and time, with over-integration where appropriate, for dealing with
pressures applied only partially to the shell surface,
Numerical integration of elements for linear computation
With shell element families 2008-2006 and 240X, numerical integration order can be selected.
The number of integration points is given by the label INTEGRATION of the command
MATERIAL PROPERTIES.

© 2019 ESI Group
INTE 0 1 2 3 4 7
default
Comments
value
8-node
quadrangle
code 2008 and 4 1 4* 9 - -
code 2408
6-node
triangle
3 1 3* 3 - 7
code 2006 and
2406
4-node
quadrangle 4 1* 4 - - -
code 2404
3-node
triangle 1 1* 3 3 - 7
code 2403
This table gives the number of integration points with respect to INTE, for linear analysis.
*: recommended
-: do not use
The default value corresponds to reduced integration.
Note:
l A warped 2008 thick shell elements can result to mass matrices not very satisfactory (particularly
for eigenmodes computation). A special mass matrix formulation can be obtained by CURVE label
following by a non null value. By default, a shell element is considered as a warped element when
its warping is lower than 0.99 (cf. CHECK command §7.2.2). This value can be changed with the
LIMIT label (lim<1.).

© 2019 ESI Group
Numerical integration of elements for non-linear computation

The numerical integration order can be selected for 2003 and 240X shell elements. The number
of integration points is given by the label INTEGRATION of the command MATERIAL
PROPERTIES.
INTEG = i, where i is a value taking the form s0p.
l p: defines the total number of integration points on the middle surface for triangular elements
(2003, 2403, 2406), or the number of integration points on the middle surface in a direction
of reference ( or ) for quadrilateral elements (2404, 2408).
l s: defines the number of integration points in the thickness (or layers) for non-linear behavior
analysis of the material (non-linear elasticity or plasticity).
The following table gives the number of integration points on the middle surface according to
(p), and the integration scheme if the INTEGRATION label is not entered.
(s) takes odd values: 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9, by default of INTEGRATION label, (s) is equal to 9
Number of integration points on the middle surface according to (p) with non-linear
analysis
- Do not use.
+ Recommended.
* Number of integration points recommended in case of linear material behavior (e.g., elastic
behavior for large displacements).
** Recommended number in the case of material with non-linear behavior.

© 2019 ESI Group
3. Material Properties: Shell Option

a. System of axes
Physical properties of laminated composite or orthotropic elements are defined with respect to
local axes. Those of isotropic elements are defined with respect to general axes.
Be careful to note that the local axes of shell elements is given in Chapter 16.2.
b. Density
For 2303, 2304 and 240X elements, RHOMF and RHOF labels allow a more precised
calculation of the mass matrix, when the volumic mass is not homogeneously distributed in
thickness.
, if RHOF < 0 it amounts to neglect rotating

inertias of the right section of the shell
c. Geometrical properties: Shell option
2003, 2004, 2203, and 2204 elements,
H=h: constant shell thickness
2006 and 2008 elements
H=h: constant thickness with value h
H = -h: variable thickness element
h is the number of a table specifying, in order, element thicknesses and nodes 1 to 8.
TABLE
h / h1 h2...h8
The thickness varies in the element with the same interpolation functions as for displacements.

© 2019 ESI Group
240X elements
The 240X shell element can have variable thickness and can be used to represent an offset
between the middle surface and the surface modeled.
M1 M2 M3 : middle surface
I1 I2 I3 : lower surface
S1 S2 S3 : upper surface
P1 P2 P3 : surface modeled, based on nodes P1, P2 and P3.
d. Eccentricity: Shell option
Eccentricity defines the position, on the z axis of the local system attached to the surface
modeled, of the middle surface of the element with respect to the surface modeled. Eccentricity
can be constant or variable in the element.
l Constant eccentricity:
EZ = e (e positive or negative)
l Variable eccentricity:
NODE EZ = e (e negative)
, whatever node i
Eccentricity variable in the element, then designates the number of the table defining
eccentricity at the various nodes of the element.
TABLE
e / e1 e2 e3...

© 2019 ESI Group
e. Thickness
H=h constant thickness with value h
H = -h thickness varies in the element
h is the number of a table specifying, in order, the element thicknesses at nodes 1, 2 and 3.
TABLE
h / h1 h2 h3...
Eccentricity and thickness vary in the element, with the same interpolation functions as for
displacements.
f. Thermo-elastic properties of isotropic shell elements (all linear or non-linear shell
elements)
E=e Young's modulus
LX =LY = λ Coefficient of thermal expansion
For elements 2003 (only in NON-LINEAR TRANSIENT procedure) and elements 240X LX,
LY can be temperature dependent:
LX , LY = -t t number of the table that defines the temperature dependent material properties.
g. Thermo elastic properties of anisotropic shell elements
Two models of anisotropic behavior of shell elements are available:
l a local anisotropic model relates stresses to strains in any point of the thickness
l a global anisotropic model relates generalized forces to generalized strains.
The following label must be indicated:

l MODEL
Followed by the number of the chosen model:

1for a local model (default value),
21for a global model.
l TABLE = t
Coefficients of the anisotropic behavior matrix are defined in table t.

l LX = λx LY = λy
λx, λy define the coefficients of thermal expansion.
l PSI = Ψ
Angle Ψ defines the rotation of element local axes to the anisotropic axes.
The content of table t for the two models is described below.
Local model (model 1)

© 2019 ESI Group
The numbers in the matrix indicate the order in which the coefficients must be defined in the
table.
If t is negative, table -t represents inverse matrix.
Global model (model 21)
The numbers in the matrix indicate the order in which the coefficients must be defined in the
table.
If t is negative, table -t represents inverse matrix.
If the shell element is a thin shell element (2003, 2004) coefficients (22) to (36) are defined
equal to zero.
For 240X elements, the two models are available.
For 2006 and 2008 elements , only the local model is available.
For 2003 and 2004 elements, only the global model is available and only the 21st terms of the
matrix must be entered.
Anisotropy is not available for 2203 and 2204 elements.
Non-linear elasticity (see also Chapter 17).
The non-linear elastic model is associated with layered formulation for local analysis at various
points in the thickness of the element.
This model is available for 2003, 240X non-linear shell elements.
The user must supply relation σ - ε between stress and strain. According to the formulation
applied (small or large displacement), σ and ε are interpreted differently.
Small displacement:

© 2019 ESI Group
Large displacement (TOTAL Lagrangian formulation):
Large displacement (MODIFIED Lagrangian formulation)
(Cauchy stress)
where S is the true surface:
MATERIAL
/ VARIABLE=t INTEG=i E=Eo
TABLE
t /
VARIABLE = t refers to the table n° t which defines the behavior law, giving the stress σ as a function of the
equivalent strain ε.
This table must be type 1 if the relation σ − ε is independent from temperature, or type 7
otherwise:
TABLE
t / 1 ε1, σ1, ε2, σ2, ...
or
TABLE
t / 7 θ1, f1, θ2, f2, ...
f1/ 1 ε1, σ1, ε2, σ2, ...
f2 / 1 ...
For a table of type 7, the values fi are the numbers of the tables, which must be type 1, and

© 2019 ESI Group
INTEG=i defines the number of layers (number of computation points in the thickness) in addition to
the number of integration points on the middle surface of the element (see 2).
E=Eo Young's modulus Eo, corresponding to zero strain, must be given.
h. Elasto-plasticity (see Chapter 17)
All non-linear shell elements (2003, 240X) accept this type of behavior. Two large classes of
elastoplastic model are available. Layered models check elastoplastic behavior locally at a
number of points (or layers) in the thickness. These models are applicable for thin or thick shell
formulations. By default, 9 layers are taken in the thickness of the element. Element integration
(integration points on the middle surface, number of layers) can be redefined using label
INTEG (see 2.).
INTEG=i
Global models are only applicable to thin shell formulations. Elastoplastic behavior is checked
globally on the thickness.
The various elastoplastic models available and associated input data are described in Chapter
17.
i. Viscoplasticity (see Chapter 17)
All non-linear shell elements (2003, 240X) accept this type of behavior. The viscoplastic
behavior models are associated with layered formulation, to check behavior locally at a number
of points (layers) in the thickness.
Chapter 17 describes the various models available, and the associated input data in detail.
Laminated composite shell behavior
Linear shell elements (2003, 2004, 2006 and 2008) accept this behavior.
A laminated composite shell may be viewed as a stack of layers parallel to the mean plane of
the shell. Each layer is made of parallel fibers oriented with respect to the local axes of the
element. The layers are described in the positive direction with respect to the local z axis
determined by the right-hand rule from the order of the connected grid points of the element.

© 2019 ESI Group
X, Y, Z global axes
x, y, z local axes of the element
Xo reference axis on the laminated composite
XLi fiber axis of the lamina i.
A laminated composite shell must be declared by the COMPOSITE command and each layer
must be described by the following commands:
Description of the labels:

© 2019 ESI Group
l With respect to the ELEMENT command

COMPOSITE Defines the element as a laminated composite shell.
ZC = zc 3-4 node element: represents the distance from the mean plane of the connected grid points
to the bottom surface of the laminated composite element (zc < 0). The default value is 0.
This distance is measured on the local z axis.
6-8 node element: not relevant.
PSI = ψo Defines the orientation of the laminated composite element axis Xo with respect to the local
shell element x axis.
l With respect to the LAYER command (60 layers per element can be treated)
H=h Uniform thickness of the layer. With the 6-8 node elements, h < 0 indicates a table of
thicknesses specified at each node.
PSI = ψi Defines the orientation of the principal material direction in the individual layer X1 with
respect to the laminated composite element Xo.
LX = lx Coefficient of thermal expansion in the principal X1 direction (fiber direction).
LY = ly Coefficient of thermal expansion in the principal transverse Y1 direction (transversal fiber
direction).
CRITERION ci layer failure criterion (HILL or TSAI) defined by the table ci.
This criterion is stored in layer data and will be used by the following postprocessing
commands:
l POSTPROCESSING COMPOSITE(see 13.6.4)
l STRESS LAYER EXTRACT(see 13.10)
l SHELL COMPOSITE(see 13.13.e)
HILL criterion =
TABLE
c1 / 1 X Y R S
where Sll, Slt, Stt, Slz et Stz being the stresses in fiber axes.
l = fiber direction.
t = traversal fiber direction.
z = transversal and perpendicular to direction t.
X = Allowable tensile stress in the principal l direction (fiber direction).
Y = Allowable tensile stress in the principal t direction (transversal fiber direction).
S = Allowable shear stress in the tz plane.
R = Allowable shear stress in the lt or lz plane.

© 2019 ESI Group
TSAI criterion = Fll Sll2 + Ftt Stt2 + 2 Flt Sll Stt + Fss Stz2 + Frr (Slt2 + Slz2) + Fl Sll
+ Ft Stt
TABLE
c2 / 2 X Y R S Xc Yc Flt*
with: Fll = , Ftt = , Fl = , Ft = , Fss = , Frr =
with the condition -1 < Flt* < 1

and usually Flt* = -0.5
With the same stress notations as for HILL criterion and the same limits:
Xc = Allowable compressive stress in the principal l direction.
Yc = Allowable compressive stress in the principal t direction.
Flt = Allowable biaxial loading stress defined by the zero-dimensional coefficient Flt*.
E, NU, TABLE : the behavior of the layer can be:
l isotropic :
E = eYoung's modulus
l transverse isotropic : a 4 or 6 component table t gives the coefficients depending if the shell is
thin (2003 and 2004 elements) or thick (2006 or 2008 elements):

o El Young's modulus in X1 direction
o Et Young's modulus in Y1 direction
o NUlt Poisson's ratio between X1 and Y1 direction
o Glt Shear modulus between W1 and Y1 direction
o NUtt Poisson's ratio in the transversal plane (Y1-Y1)
o k section correction factor (S = k S). By default, k = 1.

R
l Anisotropic : a 21 component table t gives the coefficients of the D symmetric matrix relating
strain ε to stress

© 2019 ESI Group
If t > 0
If t < 0 the inverse matrix relating stress to strain is given.

In the transverse anisotropic case, the D-1 matrix is:
Hints on how to define the orientation of the principal material direction

The PSI angle defines the orientation of the laminated composite element axis X0 with respect
to the local shell element x axis. Caution, in some cases the local axis for 2003-2004 shell
element is different from that for 2006-2008 elements (see Chapter 16).`
It is possible to define the laminated composite element axis or the principal material layer
direction by using a method which does not depend on shell element code.The X0 or Xi axis is
defined as the intersection between the shell element plane and a reference plane.`
The reference plane is defined using one of the two following methods:
l FT = 1 XX = xx YY = yy ZZ = zz KX = kx KY = ky KZ = kz
The reference plane is defined by 3 points :
Point 1 (xx, yy, zz)
Point 2 (kx, ky, kz)
Point 3 Shell element center
l FT = 2 XX = xx YY = yy ZZ = zz
The reference plane is defined by its normal vector N

N = (xx, yy, zz)
(If ψ and FT are present, the FT definition has priority over ψ)

© 2019 ESI Group
Case of sandwich materials

Sandwich panels are composed of thin skins with high Young's modulus, enclosing a low
modulus core to give bending inertia with minimum weight. Usually, the thickness of the core is
responsible for a considerable contribution of shear displacements to bending. These shear
displacements are only integrated in 2006 and 2008 shell elements.
Constant shear strain is unrealistic in sandwich plates. To get correct displacements, it is
necessary to assume that Coulomb modulus Glt for the skin has the same low value as the core,
if not it is mandatory to introduce the shear correction factor.
Example:
LAYER 1 3 / TABLE i1 H h1...

LAYER 2 / TABLE i2 H h2...
TABLES
i1 / E1, E1, NU1, G2, NU1
i2 / E2, E2, NU1, G2, NU2
or
i1 / E1, E1, NU1, G2, NU1, k
i2 / E2, E2, NU1, G2, NU2, k
User behavior law

The user behavior law is available for 2003, 240X shell elements, for non-linear formulation.
A behavior law module may be programmed by the user and directly loaded by SYSTUS
without modifying the executable image.
This module must be written in FORTRAN language and compiled before being dynamically
loaded during the execution of the program in accordance with the procedure described in the
Installation Manual.
The behavior law programmed by the user must relate the stress tensor (or its increment) to the
strain tensor (or its increment).
The user must specify the label LAW followed by value 1, with command MATERIAL
PROPERTIES.
Otherwise, the user may use the labels CREEP, MODEL, CRITERION, YIELD etc. to
characterize a behavior law model.
The programming rules are defined in Chapter 17.

© 2019 ESI Group
4. Constraints: Shell Option

UX, UY, UZ,
Constrained components of displacement and rotation
RX, RY, RZ
Case of a line:
SYMMETRY prescribed symmetry with respect to the defined line (corresponds to rigid constraint applied to
the degrees of freedom UY, UZ, RX, RY and RZ with respect to the local axes associated
with the line)
Case of a plane:
SYMMETRY prescribed symmetry with respect to the defined plane (corresponds to rigid constraint applied
to the degrees of freedom UZ, RX and RY with respect to the local axes associated with the
plane)
ANTISYMMETRY prescribed antisymmetry (corresponds to rigid constraint applied to the degrees of freedom
UX, UY and RZ with respect to the local axes associated with the plane)
KX = kx Components of stiffness concentrated at nodes
KY = ky
KZ = kz
HX = hx
HY = hy
HZ = hz
VARIABLE = g if g > 0, then, the table g defines the variation of components of stiffness with the node
displacements, following the general form:
kx = kx0. g (Ux)
ky = ky0.g (Uy)
kz = kz0.g (Uz)
hx = hx0.g (Rx)
hy = hy0.g (Ry)
hz = hz0.g (Rz)

© 2019 ESI Group

KX = kx, KY = ky, KZ = kz ZZ = z or ξ RELATIVE LOCAL
kx, ky, kz components of thickness uniformly distributed over the modeled surface (surface supported by
nodes).
ZZ = z or ξ For 240X elements, it is possible to impose this load on an external surface or the middle
RELATIVE surface of the element.
z is the value of the surface dimension where the stiffness is applied, and is expressed in the
local reference frame of the element.
ξ is the relative value of dimension z defined by (see 3.c).
If the RELATIVE label is present, the value ξ is imposed. By default, value z is imposed.
For 2003, 2004, 2203 and 2204 elements, elastic constraints are defined in the element local
axes (label LOCAL).
d. Systems of axes
PSI = ψ THETA = θ PHI = ϕ LOCAL
Constraints at the nodes are expressed in a system defined by angles (ψ, θ, ϕ), referenced to the
general system of axes. For 240X, 2006 and 2008 elements, constraints distributed on elements
are expressed in a system defined by angles (ψ, θ, ϕ), referenced to the local system of axes for
the element if the LOCAL label is present, or otherwise to the general system of axes.
FT = f specifies the number of the table in which is defined the time function by which the
FT = f
stiffnesses KX, KY, KZ, HX, HY and HZ are multiplied.
5. Applied Loads: Shell Option
In this case, the value defined by RHO is taken to be a specific weight (g.ρ).
GX = gx Components of acceleration expressed in the global coordinates system.
GY = gy
GZ = gz
PSI = ψ Orientation of axes used with respect to the global system.

THETA = θ
PHI = ϕ
THERMAL i Indicates thermo-mechanical applied load.
For globally defined thermo-mechanical loads:

© 2019 ESI Group
l The THERMOELASTIC label must appear after the OPTION command.

l 2003, 2004, 2203 and 2204 thin shell elements
THERMAL=i indicates that the thermo-mechanical load is defined by temperature card i
previously created by the TEMPERATURE command.
Card i gives the middle surface temperature for each node.
l For 2006 and 2008 thick shell elements and 240X elements,
THERMAL = i indicates that the thermo-mechanical load is defined by temperature cards i
and i+1, previously created with TEMPERATURE command.
The card i gives the middle surface temperature for each node.
Card i+1 gives the temperature gradient in the thickness of the element at each node:
T (+): temperature on the upper surface

T (-): temperature on the lower surface.
Number i is consequently odd.
Example

© 2019 ESI Group
DEFINITION
/ Example of thermoelastic analysis of thick shell
OPTION SHELL THERMOELASTICITY
Definition of geometry, constraints, etc
LOAD
1 DEAD LOAD / SW
2 ACCELERATION / GX = 20
3 FIRST THERMOELASTIC ANALYSIS / THERMAL 1
4 SECOND THERMOELASTIC ANALYSIS / THERMAL 3
TEMPERATURE 4
1 TO 8 / (15 100) (110 400)
RETURN.
CENTRIFUGAL c
PNT1 x1 y1 z1
PNT2 x2 y2 z2
For all shell elements, a centrifugal acceleration volume force, resulting from rotation round axis
P1 P2, can be applied.
C = ω2 ω is the angular rotational speed in rd/s.
x1 y1 z1 coordinates of point P1 in the general system.
x2 y2 z2 coordinates of point P2 in the general system.
UZ = Uoz l of elastically constrained nodes (equation F = K ( Uo - U))
RX = Rox l of elastically constrained elements
RY = Roy
RZ = Roz

© 2019 ESI Group
FX = fx
FY = fy
FZ = fz
Components of force and moment.
CX = cx
CY = cy
CZ = cz
d. Uniformly distributed load over elements - Pressure
PX = px PY = py PZ = pz
px, py, pz components of pressure uniformly distributed over the modeled surface (surface supported by the
nodes).
ZZ = z or ξ For 240X elements, it is possible to impose this load on an external surface or the middle
RELATIVE surface of the element.
MZ = ξ
For 2006 and 2008 elements, this load can be applied to an external surface by referencing label
MZ, followed by relative value ξ on the dimension of the loaded surface:
l ξ = 0 middle surface(default value)
l ξ =-1 lower surface
l ξ =+1 upper surface.
e. Definition of pressure as a function of coordinates: Shell option

This type of load is available for 2006 and 2008 thick shell elements, and 240X elements.
PX = px0 PY = py0 PZ = pz0
Reference pressure components.

© 2019 ESI Group
VARIABLE = g with g < 0, then the table (-g) defines a vectorial function of several variables (see 4.8 and
4.15).
The resultant pressure is :
px = px0.g1 (x,y,z)
py = py0.g2 (x,y,z)
pz = pz0.g3 (x,y,z)
where g1, g2, g3 represent the components of the function defined by the table (-g) and x,y,z
are the coordinates.
The resultant pressure is applied to the modeled surface (supported by the nodes).
ZZ = z or ξ For 2403 and 2404 elements, it is possible to impose this load on an external surface or the
RELATIVE middle surface of the element.
MZ = ξ
For 2006 and 2008 elements, this load can be applied to an external surface by referencing label
MZ, followed by relative value ξ on the dimension of the loaded surface:
l ξ = 0 middle surface(default value)
l ξ =-1 lower surface
l ξ =+1 upper surface.
INTG = n (in material properties).

At each integration point of the element, the program then considers the resultant pressure
value.
In absence of the label INTG the standard integration (defined by the label INTEGRATION) is
applied.
If the pressures vary incompatibly with the shape function of the element, the label INTG=n,
which must have been previously defined within the element MATERIAL PROPERTIES,
allows over-integration of pressures with the following rule:
l if n > 0, then the software uses an nxn point Gaussian integration scheme (n ≤ 10) for the
2404, 2408 and 2008 elements and a standard one for the 2403, 2406 and 2006 elements.
This kind of integration scheme is generally correct for pressures continuously varying within
the element.
l if n < 0, then the integration scheme involves cutting 2006, 2008, 240X elements at (-n) x (-
n) points. The number (-n) is not limited. This scheme is specially well adapted for the
treatment of discontinuous pressures, as, for example, the case of a pressure partially applied
on an element.

© 2019 ESI Group
n = -7 n = -5
X : integration point
: associated surface
The integration accuracy of pressures of course depends on the chosen scheme. By default, the
standard scheme is used.

© 2019 ESI Group
Example
DEFINITION
partial pressure
OPTION SHELL
---
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
ELEMENTS (list) / --- INTG = -4
-----
LOADS
1 discontinuous pressure
ELEMENTS (list) /PZ = -1 VARI = -1 LOCAL
----
TABLE
1 / FORTRAN
FUNCTION F(X)
DIMENSION F(3), X(3)
F(1) = 0
F(2) = 0
F(3) = 0
X1 = X(1)
Y1 = X(2)
A = X1 - 5
A = A * 3
B = Y1 - A
IF (B.GE.0) F(3) = 10
RETURN
END
RETURN
This data set defines a pressure pz = -10 in the local axes for the point located within the region
defined by y - 3 (x-5) ≥ 0 and pz=0 elsewhere.
Note:
l When programming the FORTRAN table, the dimension of F can take a value of 6 or 3. Only the
first 3 components of F are active.

© 2019 ESI Group
x: integration points and associated surfaces corresponding to pz = -10

0 : integration points and associated surfaces corresponding to pz = 0.
Initial strains
EX = εx EY = εy DX = dx DY = dy
Two components of generalized in-plane strain εx and εy, and two components of generalized
bending strain (or curvature) dx and dy, can be defined in directions x and y of the local system
for the element (see Chapter 16).
For 2006, 2008, and 240X elements these same components can be defined in a special system,
referenced to the local system of axes by angle ψ.
Example:
LOAD
1 INITIAL STRAINS
ELEMENT 10 / Ex = 1*-3 Ey = 1*-3 Dx=1*-2 Dy=1*-2 PSI=45 LOCAL

© 2019 ESI Group
Note:
l If the initial stains are to represent an initial thermal state in the element, they are determined by:
εx = +λx Tm
εy = +λy Tm
Tm : Initial temperature of the middle surface, assumed to be homogenous

T(+): Initial temperature of upper surface, assumed to be homogenous
T(-): Initial temperature of lower surface, assumed to be homogenous
f. Temperature and gradient
For 2203, 2204, 240X shell elements, a thermal load can be assigned to the element, comprising
a temperature of the middle surface, and a temperature gradient in the thickness of the element.
TEMP = temp FMT = font GRZ = grz FGRZ = fgrz
temp middle surface temperature.
grz is the value of the gradient.
font number of the table describing the time function by which temperature temp is multiplied.
fgrz number of the table describing the time function by which grz is multiplied.
Notes:
l For element types 240X grz = . For element types 2203 and 2204 grz = .
l Do not use the THERMOELASTIC label with the OPTION command to apply this type of thermal
load.
g. Concentrated force and moment in the element
For a 240X shell elements, a force and/or moment can be applied at any point of the element.
FX = fx FY = fy FZ = fz
fx, fy, fz components of the concentrated force applied
CX=cx CY=cy CZ=cz
cx, cy, cz components of the concentrated moment applied
XX=x or ξYY = y or ηZZ = z or ζRELATIVE
x, y, z coordinates of the point of application expressed in the local system of the element
ξ, η, ζ coordinates of the point of application
If the RELATIVE label is present, the ξ, η, ζ values are imposed. By default, the x, y, z values
are imposed.

© 2019 ESI Group
Note:
l The conventional shape functions of the reference finite element for a 3-node triangle make it
possible to define the relation between (x, y, z) , (ξ, η, ζ) and node coordinates (xi, yi, zi)
h. System of axes
PSI= ψ Orientation of the axes used to define loads with respect to the global axes.
THETA= θ
PHI= ϕ
LOCAL Indicates that orientation is defined with respect to the local coordinates of the element.
FT = f Number of the time function (defined in table f) by which the applied loads are multiplied.
Computed Results: Shell Option

1. Displacements
UX, UY, UZ Components of displacements and rotation at all nodes, expressed in the general system of
RX, RY, RZ coordinates.
Nodes belong to the modeled surface.
2. Reactions
FX, FY, FZ Components of reaction at rigidly constrained nodes, expressed in the general system of
CX, CY, CZ coordinates.
3. Forces in Shell Elements (linear computation)
The following FORCE components are stored in the RESULT file:
NX = membrane normal force
NXY = membrane shear force
NY = membrane normal force
MX = bending moment
MXY = torsional moment
MY = bending moment

© 2019 ESI Group
2003, 2004, 2203 and 2204 thin shell elements

These forces, calculated at the center of the elements, are expressed in the local system of the
elements.
The POST-PROCESSING procedure (13.6) is used to access stresses in the thickness of the
element. These stresses are obtained from membrane normal forces and bending moments:
σx = NX/h + (12MX/h3) v
σy = NY/h + (12MY/h3) v
τxy = NXY/h + (12MXY/h3) v
where v is the relative distance of the computation point from the middle surface.
2006 and 2008 thin or 240X thick shell elements
These forces are calculated as the mean of the values at the Gaussian integration points,
expressed in the local system of the element at these points.
As a first approximation, NX, NXY, NY, MX, MXY and MY can be taken as the forces at the
centroid of the element, expressed in the local system of the element at this point.
Force signs
Membrane forces NX, NXY and NY take the same sign as the corresponding middle surface
stresses (positive=traction, negative=compression).
σx = NX/h τxy = NXY/h σy = NY/h
The following rule is applied for bending moments:
l On the upper face, stresses take the same sign as moments
l On the lower face, stresses take the opposite sign as moments
σx = + (12MX/h3) v

© 2019 ESI Group
τxy = + (12MXY/h3) v
σy = + (12MY/h3) v
v is the distance from the middle surface.
Forces are also stored in the STRESS file, at the integration points for 2006, 2008, 240X shell
elements:
NX membrane normal force
NXY membrane shear force
NY membrane normal force
MX bending moment
MXY torsional moment
MY bending moment
TX, TY shear forces stored in the STRAIN record of the STRESS file.
4. Forces in Shell Elements (non-linear computation)
For 2003, 240X non-linear shell elements, the program stores a number of results for the
element in the FORCE sub-file of the TRANSIENT file:
l generalized membrane normal forces, bending moments, transverse shear forces, as mean
values and at the Gaussian integration points,
l generalized membrane, bending, and transverse shear strains, as mean values and at the
Gaussian integration points,
l stresses in the thickness of the element, if the material has non-linear behavior.
etc.
The structure and content of the FORCE file are detailed in Chapter 17.

© 2019 ESI Group
8.4 Continuous Media
8.4 CONTINUOUS MEDIA

8.4.1 Introduction
Included under this heading are two dimensional structures (plane strain, plane stress and solids
of revolution), and three dimensional structures (solids of arbitrary geometric form). In both
cases the SOLVE routine is used for the calculation of results including the stress and strain
tensors at the Gauss integration points of each element.
The stress and strain tensors at nodes may be computed by the AVERAGE routine (see
Chapter 13.2).
Also included as elements of these types of structure are non-linear pin-jointed members, which
are not available with the PLANE TRUSS or TRUSS options.

© 2019 ESI Group
8.4.2 Two Dimensional Analysis

Thermo-mechanical analysis of:
l plates in a state of plane stress,
l continuous media in a state of plane strain,
l thin-walled and solid axisymmetric structures,
l plane pin-jointed frames.
Notes:
l Thin-walled axisymmetric structures are taken to behave as membranes (no bending).
l Pin-jointed members are taken to be subject to axial load only (no bending or torsion).
1. Reference Frame
Plane structures are defined in the (x, y) plane.
Axisymmetrical structures are defined by a cross-section in the (x, y) plane, the y axis being
taken as the axis of symmetry. A node is therefore described by its pair of Cartesian coordinates
(x, y) in the global system.
UX: displacement in the x direction
UY: displacement in the y direction
FX: force in the x direction
FY: force in the y direction
4. Systems of Axes
coordinates of an element by an angle PSI.
Figure 8-6

© 2019 ESI Group
Input Data
OPTION TWO DIMENSIONAL (sub-option).
where (sub-option) is one of the following labels :

PLANE plates in a state of plane stress, and plane pin-jointed frames,
TRANSLATION continuous media in a state of plane strain,
TRANSLATION Uz Rx Ry:
continuous media in a state of generalized plane strain. The labels Rx and Ry are optional,
but can only be activated with the label Uz.
The plain strain assumption assumes that the strain component is uniformely nil. The
plain strain assumption leads to assume to be:
The structure being limited by 2 planes, this assumption is equivalent to authorize the
displacement and the rotation of a plane with respect to the other.
The label Uz leads to add a supplementary (global) degree of freedom (term of the above
formula). In the same way Rx adds the dof , and Ry the dof .
AXISYMMETRIC Axially symmetric structures.
The sub- option PLANE may coexist with the sub- options TRANSLATION or
AXISYMMETRIC.
It is possible to specify sub-options and thicknesses of elements in such a way that in a structure
which is generally axisymmetric or in a state of plane-strain, a certain number of elements are in
a state of plane stress.

© 2019 ESI Group
Permissible combinations are summarized in the following tables.

Overall plane strain behavior: Two dimensional option
TWO DIMENSIONAL PLANE TRANSLATION OPTION
Dimension of element
1 2
≠0 Plane strain Plane stress
H
=0 Plane stress Plane strain
Overall axisymmetric behavior: Two dimensional option
TWO DIMENSIONAL PLANE AXISYMMETRIC OPTION
Dimension of element
1 2
≠0 Axisymmetric (*) Plane stress
H
=0 Plane stress Axisymmetric
(*) for surface elements, H must be non-zero but very small.
The default sub-option is PLANE.
2. Elements
Available elements are listed in table 8.4.2 below. Note that these include all the elements of
the PLANE TRUSS type.
All elements are iso-parametric except for the pin-jointed member type code 1102 and special
elements with codes x9xx, 1602 and x8xx.
The four-node quadrangle with type code 2x04 is a non-conforming element, which gives
better results for structures subject to bending.
This element may be reduced to a triangle, by taking two of the four nodes to be the same.
X is the number of integration points of the element in each direction (valid values: from 2 for
regular shape elements to 4 for very distorted elements) ; the cost of computation varies as a
function of the square of the x number.

© 2019 ESI Group
Number of Geometric
nodes form
Cross section of a one-
1 1 Point 0
dimensional member.
1002 2 l Pin-jointed member
1003 3 One l Cross section of a membrane
1
1004 4 dimensional (in plane or axisymmetric
1005 5 strain)
l Straight segment of an
infinite plate in two
1702 2
directions (in-plane or
1703 3 One generalized in-plane strain).
1
1704 4 dimensional
l Straight segment of an
1705 5
infinite cylinder
(axisymmetrical)
2003 3
l Plate
2005 5
Triangle 2 l Cross section of a solid
2006 6
structure.
2009 9
2004 4
l Plate
2007 7
Quadrangle 2 l Cross section of a solid
2008 8
structure.
2012 12
l Non conforming element
2X04 4 Quadrangle 2 (plane stress or plane strain
only).
One
1102 2 1 l Pin-jointed member
dimensional
Special element, whose
Not Not stiffness, mass and damping
X9XX Any
applicable applicable matrices and load vectors are
precalculated.
Special element, whose
One
1602 2 1 stiffness varies with the
dimensional
displacements.
Not Not
Table 8.7
Note:
l For axially symmetric structures, a six node triangle element (2006) may not have a side merged
with the axis of symmetry.

© 2019 ESI Group
Modeling infinite domains

SYSTUS can model infinite domains by means of spatial transformation. Refer to Chapter 22
for corresponding data input. Only 2-dimensional elements are used and the model must not
therefore have any surface load (pressure) on the edge of the transformed space. This option is
limited to linear or non-linear problems involving small displacements and small strains.
170X elements: Two dimensional option
170x elements are used to model the behavior of the following:
l straight segment of an infinite plate in 2 directions using the TWO DIMENSIONAL
TRANSLATION option.
l straight segment of an infinite cylinder using the TWO DIMENSIONAL
AXISYMMETRICAL option.
In the first case, the element has mono-axial behavior for strain, and triaxial behavior for stress:
εxx ≠ 0
εyy = εzz = εxy = εxz = εyz = 0
σxx ≠ 0, σyy ≠ 0, σzz ≠ 0, σxz = σyz = σxz = 0
In the presence of generalized in- plane strain, the generalized in- plane strain hypothesis
concerns directions x and z.

© 2019 ESI Group
This option is particularly useful for modeling the behavior of an infinite plate subjected to a
heterogeneous temperature field in the thickness of the element.
In the second case, the element has biaxial behavior for strain, and triaxial behavior for stress.
εxx ≠ 0, εzz ≠ 0
εyy = εxy = εxz = εyz = 0
σxx ≠ 0, σyy ≠ 0, σzz ≠ 0,
σxy = σxz = σyz = 0
170x elements can only be used with the NON-LINEAR TRANSIENT procedure.
3. Material Properties: Two Dimensional Option
a. Axes
Material properties of two-dimensional elements (plane and axisymmetric structures) are taken
to be defined with respect to the global axes.
The label:
PSI : Ψ
is used to identify, if necessary, the axes in which are defined :
l the anisotropic elastic material tensor
l the thermal expansion coefficients LX, LY, LZ
l the tensors G and H for the TSAI criterion of plasticity.
b. Isotropic material (see Chapter 17)

E= e Young' modulus
NU= ν Poisson's ratio

© 2019 ESI Group
In thermoelasticity, the following conventions are applied for the stiffness computation:
In thermoelasticity analysis and non linear analysis, E and NU may depend on temperature, e
and ν must then be negative. The tables (-e) and (-ν) define the variations of Young's modulus
and Poisson's ratio as a function of temperature.
l In the lack of load (eigenmodes computation): the first field of temperature is taken into
account.
l In the presence of loads:
o the field of temperature of the first load is taken into account,
o if the first load doesn't have any field of temperature, the first field of temperature is taken
into account.
In theory, the structure is stable. The LEJEUNE-DIRICHLET stability condition imposes
.
For υ values near to 0.5 (incompressible material), an hyper elastic behavior's law can be
necessary (§17.6)
c. Anisotropic material (see Chapter 17)
TABLE = t specifies the number t of the table (defined by the TABLE routine) in
which ten coefficients of the symmetric matrix D, which relates stresses
σ to strains ε, are given :
σ=D.ε
The numbers in the matrix show the order in which the coefficients must appear in the table t:
The user must verify that D coefficients result in a stable structure.

© 2019 ESI Group
Example :
TABLE
t / D11 D12 D13 D14 D22 D23 D24 D33 D34 D44
Note:
l In the case of pin-jointed members, membranes or a plate in a state of plane stress, the matrix D
is partially empty; however, the 10 coefficients including zeros, must be defined in the table:
Pin-jointed member
Axisymmetric membrane
Plane stress
PSI = ψ Defines the orientation of the axes with respect to which D is defined.
d. Section geometry
Pin-jointed members: See plane pin-jointed frames, Chapter 8.2.5.
Plates and axisymmetric membranes: The thickness must be defined.
Elements of uniform thickness:
H=h defines the thickness of the element.
Elements of variable thickness:
H = -h specifies the number t of the table in which are defined the thicknesses of the element at its
nodes:
TABLE
h/ h1 h2 ............. hi ............... hn
Where hi = The thickness at node i of the element.

© 2019 ESI Group
The thickness is interpolated over the element, using the shape functions for geometry and
displacement.
If desired, the calculation of stresses along the edge of a plate or on the surface of a solid
structure may be requested by using the label
SURFACE+1
in the definition of one-dimensional elements (pin-jointed members in plane stress or plane
strain and membranes in the case of axisymmetry). This is used for the calculation of stress in
those elements not only in their axial directions, but also perpendicular to the plane of analysis.
To calculate stresses on the surface of a solid of revolution or translation (plane strain), or along
the edge of a plate subject to plane stress, it is necessary to specify on that surface or edge (i.e.,
mesh boundary) the pin-jointed or membrane elements assigned the label SURFACE. In order
that these elements make no contribution to structural stiffness, they should have zero thickness
(H = h omitted).
The SURFACE label is followed by:
l 1 if the local y axis of the pin-jointed or membrane element is the outward normal to the plate
or solid structure,
l -1 if the local y axis of the pin-jointed or membrane element is directed into the plate or solid
structure.
This value has a meaning only if the element is loaded with a pressure in its local axes
e. Thermoelasticity (see Chapter 17)
Coefficients of thermal expansion in the directions of the axes (local or
global) specified for definition of material properties.
PSI = ψ Defines the axes in which lx, ly, lz are expressed.

For non- linear calculations, the material properties LX, LY, LZ may depend on the
temperature.
<element n°> / LX LY LZ -t
t number of the table that defines the temperature-dependent material properties.
f. Density
RHO = ρ Defines density
ALPHA = α Calculation of the damping matrix of each element in accordance with the formula:
BETA = β [C]= α [K] + β [M]

© 2019 ESI Group
h. Non-linear elasticity (see Chapter 17)

VARIABLE = t refers to the table number t which defines the behavior law, giving the equivalent stress σ
as a function of the equivalent strain ε.
This table must be type 1 if the relation σ-ε is independent on temperature, or type 7
otherwise:
TABLE
t / 1 ε1, σ1, ε2, σ2, ...
or
TABLE
t / 7 θ1, f1, θ2, f2, ...
f1/ 1ε1, σ1, ε2, σ2, ...
f2 / 1...
In previous tables, σ and ε have different significance according to the formulation applied.
l if small displacements:
l if large transformation (large displacements, large strains) is taken into account by the total
Lagrangian formulation:
l if large transformation (large displacements, large strains) is taken into account by the
modified Lagrangian formulation.

The program calculates at each Gaussian point the secant modulus:
where

© 2019 ESI Group
Note:
l It is necessary to define the Young's modulus Eo corresponding to a zero strain, specifying the
label E.
i. Plasticity (see Chapter 17)
j. Elastoplasticity (see Chapter 17)
k. Viscoelasticity (see Chapter 17)
l. Hyperelasticity (see Chapter 17)
m. User behavior law (see Chapter 17)
n. Reduced integration rule for an element in a TRANSIENT NON-LINEAR procedure
INTEGRATION = n
n: defines the integration order of the elements
INTEGRATION = 2 corresponds to the usual integration order of the linear elements
INTEGRATION = 3 corresponds to the usual integration order of the quadratic elements.
These values are used as default values by the program.
For a non-linear behavior of the material, a selective reduced integration is systematically used
with 2004 elements, except for the generalized plane strain option (use reduced integration
quadratic elements), and for plane stress option.
It is strongly recommended to use under integration (or reduced integration) for second order
elements (2006, 2008) in the following cases:
l plasticity with von Mises criterion
l viscoplasticity
l viscoelasticity
l viscoplastic creep
l hyperelasticity
l elasticity , where 0.45 < ν < 0.5

The reduced integration order is obtained after subtracting the value 1 from the usual order of
integration.
The integration points corresponding to the usual and reduced integration schemes are presented
in chapter 13.2.7.The table below, presents the number of integration points as a function of the
value n, for the two dimensional elements.
1002 1003 1004 1005 2003 2004 2006 2008 2009 2012
INTEG=1 1 - - - 1 1 - - - -
INTEG=2 2 2 - - 1 4 3 4 - -
INTEG=3 - 3 3 - 3 - 3 9 7 9
INTEG=4 - - 4 4 - - - - - 16
INTEG=5 - - - 5 - - - - - -

© 2019 ESI Group
The default values for the number of integration points are framed.
4. Constraints: Two Dimensional Option
UX, UY Constrained components of displacement.
following labels:
applied to the degree of freedom UY with respect to the local axes associated with the
line)
UX) in BIDIMENSIONAL option. In this case the line defined must be Oy axis.
KY = ky
VARIABLE = g if g > 0, then, for a non linear, table g defines the variation
of components of stiffness with the node displacements,
following the general form :
kx = kx0 . g(Ux)
ky = ky0 . g(Uy)
if g < 0, then, table (-g) defines a vectorial function of
several variables (see 4.7 and 4.15).
KX = kx
KY = ky
d. Axes
LOCAL The orientation is specified with respect to the local coordinate
system of the element (for elastic constraints distributed over
elements only).
e. Axisymmetric structures
Stiffnesses are specified for a sector subtending one radian at the axis for elastic constraints at
nodes.
Stiffnesses are specified for a sector subtending one radian at the axis for elastic constraints
distributed over elements. The label UNIT may be used to specify that they are given for unit

© 2019 ESI Group
distance in the circumferential direction instead. These values are then multiplied by the
program by the radius R to obtain the value for one radian.
f. Dynamic analysis
FT = f Specifies the number f of the table in which is defined the time
function by which are multiplied the stiffnesses kx and ky.
5. Applied Loads: Two Dimensional Option
In this case the value defined by RHO is taken to be a specific weight
(g.ρ).
GX = gx Components of acceleration
GY = gy
FZ = f Imposes a global force equal to f in the option TWO-DIMENSIONAL
TRANSLATION UZ… (generalized plane strain).
MX = mx Imposes a global moment equal to mx and/or my in the option
MY = my TWODIMENSIONAL TRANSLATION UZ…(generalized plane
strain).
The moments are defined relatively to axes passing through the origin of
the global coordinate axes.
Attention, it is not possible to impose the moments only under
SOLVE.
FT = if Number of the table that defines the time function associated with FZ in
the direction Oz.
CENTRIFUGAL= For an axisymmetric structure, specifies centrifugal force due to rotation
c about the y axis :
c : Represents the square of angular velocity (Radian/second).
It is also possible to define the axis of rotation by means of two points
(except for non-linear) :
n title / CENTRIFUGAL c PNT1 x1 y1 z1 PNT2 x2 y2 z2
(x1 y1 z1) and (x2 y2 z2) are the coordinates of the two points.
THERMAL i Thermoelastic analysis with temperature distribution defined by
temperature card i.
Note:
l There are a maximum of 10 load cases with initial strain due to the effect of temperature.

© 2019 ESI Group
UX=Uox Components of imposed displacements
UY=Uoy l of rigidly constrained nodes
l of elastically constrained nodes (equation F = K (Uo – U))
VARIABLE=g with g < 0, for non linear analysis only, then the table (-g) defines a
vectorial function of several variables (see 4.8 and 4.15), for the
nodes only.
FX = fx
Components of force
FY = fy
VARIABLE = g with g < 0, for non linear analysis only, then the table (-g) defines a
vectorial function of several variables (see 4.8 and 4.15).
d.Uniformly distributed load over elements
PX = px
Components of pressure
PY = py
vectorial function of several variables (see 4.8 and 4.15), for the
nodes only.
e. Torque load
The "torque" here, refers to the screw theory encompassing loads and torque components.
In "TWO-DIMENSIONAL (PLANE AND TRANSLATION)" analysis, these components
are FX, FY and CZ. They can be applied on a set of One-Dimensional elements through a
master node. The load applied is automatically distributed in the form of pressures on these
elements or of concentrated forces on nodes.
The "torque" on the center of gravity G of the given elements is transported from the master
node M, it is written:
Note:
l The torque load is not available in "TWO-DIMENSIONAL AXISYMMETRIC" option.
Input Data
LOADS
… (Elements) / TORQUE XM=xm YM=ym ZM=zm FX = fx FY=fy CZ=cz --
FT= ft (R) (FORCE)
RETURN

© 2019 ESI Group
TORQUE Label to activate the torque load.

(Elements) Defines a list or a group of One Dimensional elements.
XM=xm (Optional) These labels define the coordinates of the master node. In the absence of these labels,
YM=ym the master node is automatically computed as a center of gravity of the given elements.
ZM=zm
FX=fx FY= fy Components of force of the "torque" load.
CZ=cz Component of torque of the "torque" load.
FT= ft Associated time function in a case of transient analysis.
(R) Are the axes with respect to which the "torque" load can be defined (see 1.4.5 Coordinate
System). The axes can be defined with PSI, THETA, PHI angles or with coordinates XX
YY ZZ, XA YA ZA and XB YB ZB.
The LOCAL label is not taken into account. By default, R is the global frame.
FORCE (Optional) Allows the distribution of the "torque" load in the form of forces concentrated at nodes
of the given elements. By default, the "torque" is distributed in the form of pressures on the given
elements.
f. Axisymmetric structures
Forces and pressures are entered for a sector subtending an angle of one radian at the axis.
The label UNIT may be used to specify that they are given for unit distance in the
circumferential direction instead. These values are then multiplied by the program by the radius
R to obtain the value for one radian.
Value entered
Physical data with UNIT without UNIT
Pressure = P P PxR
Global Force
g. Initial strains
EX = εx
Components of mean initial strain in the element, necessarily expressed
EY = εy
with respect to the LOCAL coordinate system of the element.
EZ = εz
vectorial function of several variables (see 4.8 and 4.15), for the nodes
only.
In the special case of initial strain due to the effect of temperature, strains are determined by the
temperature T at each node of the element, and coefficients of thermal expansion as follows:
εx = lx . T

© 2019 ESI Group
εy = ly . T
εz = lz . T
Note:
l There are a maximum of 10 load cases with initial strain due to the effect of temperature.
h. System of axes
LOCAL Indicates that the orientation is defined with respect to the local
coordinate system of the element.
FT = f Specifies the number of the table in which is defined the time
function by which loads are multiplied.
Computed Results: Two Dimensional Option

1. Displacements
UX, UY Components of displacement at all nodes, with respect to the global axes.
2. Reactions
FX, FY Components of reaction at rigidly constrained nodes, with respect to the
global axes.
3. Stresses
Average stresses in each element, in the following order:
(σx, σy, τxy, σz)
These are components with respect to either the global coordinate system, for two-dimensional
elements, or the local coordinate system, for one-dimensional elements.
4. STRESS File
The file contains stress and strain values at a certain number of Gaussian integration points,
according to the variation of stress over each element (see section 13.2. : Averaging).
Note:
l Pin-jointed member, type code 1102:
l the computed forces are the values of axial load Nx at each end of the element.
l No data is written to the STRESS file.
5. FORCES File
In the generalized plain strain hypothesis (option TWO-DIMENSIONAL TRANSLATION
UZ Rx Ry), the global strain in the Z direction as well as the rotations Rx and Ry are stored in
the average values of first element (internal number) in the FORCE file.

© 2019 ESI Group
8.4.3 Three Dimensional Analysis

Thermoelastic analysis of:
l solid structures,
l thin wall structures,
l three dimensional pin-jointed frames,
Notes:
l Thin-wall structures are taken to behave as membranes (no bending).
l Pin-jointed members are taken to be subject to axial load only (no bending or torsion).
1. Reference Frame
Three dimensional structures are defined in (x, y, z) space.
A node is therefore described by its three Cartesian coordinates (x, y, z) in the global system.

© 2019 ESI Group
4. Systems of Axes
coordinates of an element by the angles PSI, THETA and PHI.
Input Data
OPTION THREE DIMENSIONAL
2. Elements
Available elements are listed in table below.
Note that these include all the elements of structure type TRUSS (3D).
All elements are isoparametric except for the pin-jointed member type code 1102 and special
elements with codes x9xx, 1602 and x8xx.
The eight-node hexahedron with type code 3x08 is a nonconforming element, which gives
better results for structures subject to bending.
This element may be degenerated into a prism, each triangular face being created by taking two
out of the four nodes of a face to be the same.
x is the number of integration points of the element, in each direction (valid values : from 2 for
regular shape elements to 4 for very distorted elements), the cost of computation varies as a
function of the cube of the x number.
Pyramidal elements, type 3005 and 3013 are mainly used as transition elements between
hexahedral and tetrahedral elements.
The "Q1P0" mathematical formulation for elements type 3004, 3006 and 3008 is activated with
the label PRESSURE =1. Elements of the "Q1P0" family are linear elements with a pressure
internal degree of freedom. This formulation is dedicated to quasi incompressible material
behavior laws such as large inelastic strains. The default 3008 hexahedral element is using a
mixed interpolation of tensorial components formulation. Both methods can accurately take into
account the quasi incompressibility of the material. But, with high thermal gradients, it is
advisable to use Q1P0 elements that give better results on the spherical part of the stress tensor
at integration points. It is important to note that Q1P0 elements have to be used with Von Mises
elastoplastic or elastoviscoplastic materials. They can't be used with perfectly incompressible
material or with plastic criterions depending on the hydrostatic pressure, like the Drucker-Prager
criterion.
The mixed displacement-pressure formulation of the tetrahedral element number 3004 is
activated with the MIXT label following the option name (OPTION THREE DIMENTIONAL
MIXT). Under this option, nodes have four degrees of freedom, three displacements and one
pressure. In addition, tetrahedral elements have an internal pressure degree of freedom. This
element is often called MINI element or P1+/P1 element.
The TRIA 3 label added to the list of element material properties, activates an almost identical
formulation but without the internal pressure degree of freedom.

© 2019 ESI Group
The TRIA 4 label is similar to TRIA 3 but activates a numerical stabilization of the pressure that
improves the results in large transformations (usable only with behavior UPDLAGRANGE
and EULER).
For those two values of TRIA a P1/P1 element is defined. This latter element is called P1/P1.
For both elements, the main benefit of the mixed formulation consists in being more accurate
than classical linear tetrahedral element when the material behavior is quasi incompressible.
Indeed, it is well known that classical linear tetrahedral element is subjected to the locking
effect.
It is advisable to use mixed tetrahedral element with a Newton- Raphson method
(ALGORITHM OPTI 1).
Number of Geometric
nodes form
1002 2
1003 3 One Pin-jointed member
1
1004 4 dimensional
1005 5
2003 3
2005 5
Triangle 2 Membrane element
2006 6
2009 9
2004 4
2007 7
Quadrangle 2 Membrane element
2008 8
2012 12
3004 4
Tetrahedron 3 Solid element
3010 10
3005 5
Pyramid 3 Solid element
3013 13
3006 6
Prism 3 Solid element
3015 15
3008 8
Hexahedron 3 Solid element
3020 20
3X08 8 Hexahedron 3 Non-conforming element
One- Pin-jointed member (Slope
1102 2 1
dimensional deflection method)
Special element whose
Not Not stiffness, mass and damping
X9XX Any
applicable applicable matrices load vectors are
precalculated

© 2019 ESI Group
Number of Geometric
nodes form
Special element whose
One
1602 2 1 stiffness varies with the
dimensional
displacements
Not Not
TABLE 8.8
Modeling infinite domains
SYSTUS can model infinite domains by means of spatial transformations. Refer to Chapter 22
for corresponding data input. Only 3-dimensional elements are used and the model must not
therefore have any surface load (pressure) on the edge of the transformed space.
This option is limited to linear or non-linear problems involving small displacements and small
strains.
3. Material Properties
a. Axes
The material properties of one- dimensional elements (pin- jointed elements) and two-
dimensional elements (membranes) are always defined with respect to the local coordinate
system of the element.
Material properties of three-dimensional (solid) elements are always defined with respect to the
global axes.
The labels:
PSI = Ψ THETA = θ, PHI = ϕ
are used to define, if necessary, the axes in which are defined :
l the anisotropic elastic material tensor
l the thermal expansion coefficients LX, LY, LZ
l the tensors G and H for the TSAI criterion of plasticity.
b. Isotropic material (see also Chapter 17)
E=e Young's modulus
In thermoelasticity, the following conventions are applied for the stiffness computation:
In thermoelasticity analysis and non linear analysis, E and ν may depend on temperature, e and
ν must then be negative. The tables (-e) and (-ν) define the variations of Young's modulus and
Poisson's ratio as a function of temperature.
l In the lack of load (eigenmodes computation): the first field of temperature is taken into
account.
l In the presence of loads:

© 2019 ESI Group
o the field of temperature of the first load is taken into account,

o if the first load doesn't have any field of temperature, the first field of temperature is taken
into account.
In theory, the structure is stable. The LEJEUNE-DIRICHLET stability condition imposes
.
For υ values near to 0.5 (incompressible material), an hyper elastic behavior's law may be
necessary (Chapter 17.6)
c. Anisotropic material (see also Chapter 17)
TABLE = t specifies the number t of the table in which are defined 21 coefficients
of a symmetric matrix D which relates stresses σ to strains ε.
σ=D.ε
The order in which coefficients must be arranged in the table is as follows:

The user must verify that D coefficients result in a stable structure.
Example
TABLE
t / D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D33 D34 D35 --
D36 -D44 D45 D46 D55 D56 D66
Remember here the significance of strains:

© 2019 ESI Group
Note:
l In the cases of pin-jointed members and membranes the matrix D is partially empty; however, the
21 coefficients including zeros must be listed in the table t:
l Pin-jointed members
l Membrane
PHI = ϕ
Orientation of the axes with respect to which coefficients of
PSI = ψ
thematrix D are defined.
THETA = θ
d. Material properties
l Pin-jointed members : see three-dimensional pin-jointed frames, Chapter 8.2.6
l Membranes: the thickness must be defined.
o Elements of uniform thickness:
H=h Defines the thickness of the element.

o Elements of variable thickness:
H = -t Specifies the number t of the table in which are defined the thicknesses of the element at its
nodes:
TABLE
h/ h1 h2........ hi........ hn
Where hi = thickness at node i of the element.

The thickness is interpolated over the element, using the shape functions for geometry and
displacement.
If desired, the calculation of stresses on the surface of a solid structure may be requested by
using the label
SURFACE + 1

© 2019 ESI Group
in the definition of membrane elements which lie on that surface. Stress in these elements is then
calculated not according to the formula for membranes, but in the same way as for the three-
dimensional solid elements to which they are attached. When specifying such membrane
elements over the surface of the structure, their thickness as defined by H = h should be set to
zero (H = h to be omitted), so that no additional contribution is made to structural stiffness.
The SURFACE label is followed by:
l 1 if the local y axis of the membrane element is the outward normal to the solid structure,
l -1 if the local y axis of the membrane element is directed into the solid structure.
This value has a meaning only if the element is loaded with a pressure in its local axes.
See Chapter 8.4.2. OPTION TWO-DIMENSIONAL for the following section:
e. Thermoelasticity
f. Density
Refer to Chapter 17 for details of material behavior laws.
h. Non-linear; elasticity
i. Elastoplasticity;
j. Viscoplasticity;
k. Viscoelasticity;
l. User behavior law;
m. Hyperelasticity
n. Reduced integration rule for an element in a NON-LINEAR TRANSIENT procedure
INTEGRATION = n
n: defines the integration order of the elements
INTEGRATION = 2 corresponds to the usual integration order of linear elements
INTEGRATION = 3 corresponds to the usual integration order of quadratic elements.
These values are used as default values by the program.
We advice to use reduced integration for second order elements (3015,3020) in the following
cases:
l plasticity with von Mises criterion
l viscoplasticity
l viscoelasticity
l viscoplastic creep
l hyperelasticity
l elasticity , where 0.45 ≤ ν < 0.5

The under integration order or reduced integration is obtained after subtracting the value 1 from
the usual order of integration.

© 2019 ESI Group
The integration points corresponding to the usual and reduced integration schemes are presented
in section 13.2.7. The table, below, presents the number of integration points as a function of
the value n, for three dimensional elements.
3004 3006 3008 3010 3015 3020
INTEG=1 1 1 1 - - -
INTEG=2 1 2 8 4 6 8
INTEG=3 - - - 4 9 27
The default values for the number of integration points are framed.
4. Constraints
Case of a line:
SYMMETRY prescribed symmetry with respect to the defined line (corresponds
to rigid constraint applied to the degrees of freedom UY and UZ
ANTISYMMETRY prescribed antisymmetry (corresponds to rigid constraint applied
to the degree of freedom UX with respect to the local axes
associated with the line)
Case of a plane:
SYMMETRY prescribed symmetry with respect to the defined plane
(corresponds to rigid constraint applied to the degree of freedom
UZ with respect to the local axes associated with the plane)
ANTISYMMETRY prescribed antisymmetry (corresponds to rigid constraint applied
to the degrees of freedom UX and UY with respect to the local
axes associated with the plane)
KX = kx Components of stiffness concentrated at the nodes.
KY = ky
KZ = kz

© 2019 ESI Group
VARIABLE = g if g > 0, then the table g defines, in non linear mechanics,

the variation of components of stiffness as a function of
node displacements :
kx = kx0 . g(Ux)
ky = ky0 . g(Uy)
kz = kz0 . g(Rz)
if g < 0, then table (-g) defines a vectorial function of
several variables (see 4.7 and 4.15).
KX = kx
Components of stiffness uniformly distributed over
KY = ky
elements
KZ = kz
d. Axes
THETA = θ
PHI = ϕ
LOCAL The orientation is specified with respect to the local coordinate
system of the element (for elastic constraints distributed over
elements only).
e. Dynamic analysis
FT = f Specifies the number f of the table in which is defined the time
function by which the values kx, ky and kz are multiplied.
5. Applied Loads
In this case the value defined by RHO is taken to be a
specific weight (g.ρ).
GX = gx
GY = gy Components of acceleration.
GZ = gz
THERMAL i Thermoelastic analysis with temperature distribution
defined by temperature card i.
CENTRIFUGAL PNT1... PNT2(see 8.4.2)
Note:
l There are a maximum of 10 load cases due to the effect of temperature.

© 2019 ESI Group
UX= Uox Components of imposed displacements
UZ = Uoz
l of elastically constrained nodes (equation F = K ( Uo - U))
only.
FX = fx Components of force.
FY = fy
FZ = fz
VARIABLE=g with g < 0, for non linear analysis only,then the table (-g) defines a
vectorial function of several variables (see 4.8 and 4.15).
PX = px
PY = py Components of pressure.
PZ = pz
only.
e. Torque load
The "torque" here, refers to the screw theory encompassing loads and torque components.
In "THREE-DIMENSIONAL" analysis these components are FX, FY, FZ, CX, CY and CZ.
They can be applied on a set of TWO-Dimensional elements through a master node. The load
applied is automatically distributed in the form of pressures on these elements or concentrated
forces at nodes of these elements.
The "torque" on the center of gravity G of the given elements is transported from the master
node M, it is written:
Input data
LOADS
… (Elements) / TORQUE XM=xm YM=ym ZM=zm FX = fx FY=fy FZ=fz --
CX= cx CY=cy CZ=cz FT= ft (R) (FORCE)
RETURN

© 2019 ESI Group
TORQUE Label to activate the "torque" load.

(Elements) Defines a list or a group of 2D elements.
XM=xm YM=ym (Optional) These labels define the coordinates of the master
ZM=zm node.
In absence of these labels, the master node is computed
automatically as a center of gravity of the given elements.
FX=fx FY= fy
Components of force of the "torque" load.
FZ=fz
CX=cx CY=cy
Components of torque of the "torque" load.
CZ=cz
FT= ft Associated time function in a case of transient analysis.
(R) Are the axes with respect to which the ‘torque’ load can be
defined (see 1.4.5 Coordinate System). The axes can be
defined with PSI, THETA, PHI angles or with coordinates
XX YY ZZ, XA YA ZA and XB YB ZB.
The label LOCAL is not taken in to account. By default, R
is the global system.
FORCE (Optional) Allows the distribution of the ‘torque’ load in the
form of forces concentrated at nodes of the given elements. By
default, the "torque" is distributed in the form of pressures on
the given elements.
f. Initial strains
EX = εx
Components of average initial strain in the element, necessarily
EY = εy
expressed with respect to the local coordinate system of the element.
EZ = εz
only.
In the special case of initial strain due to the effect of temperature, strains are determined by the
temperature T at each node of the element, and coefficients of thermal expansion as follows:
εx = lx . T
εy = ly . T
εz = lz . T
Note:
l There are a maximum of 10 load cases with initial strain.
g. Axes

© 2019 ESI Group
PSI= ψ Orientation of axes used to define loads.

THETA = θ
PHI= ϕ
LOCAL Indicates that the orientation is defined with respect to the local
coordinates system of the element.
h. Transient analysis
FT = f Specifies the number of the table in which is defined the time function by
which loads are multiplied.
Computed Results
1. Displacements
UX, UY, UZ = Components of displacement at all nodes, with respect to the global axes.
2. Reactions
FX, FY, FZ Components of reaction at rigidly constrained nodes, with respect to the global axes.
3. Stresses
Average stresses in each element, in the following order:
σx, σy, σz, τxy, τxz, τyz
These are components with respect to the system chosen for definition of material properties,
this being either the global system or the local coordinate system depending upon the dimension
of the element.
4. STRESS File
The file contains values of stress and strain at a certain number of Gaussian integration points
according to the variation of stress over each element (see Chapter 13.2.: AVERAGE).
Note:
l Pin-jointed member, element code 1102 : the computed forces are the values of axial load Nx at
each end of the element. No data is written to the STRESS file.

© 2019 ESI Group
8.5 Harmonic Loading
8.5 HARMONIC LOADING

In certain cases a structure with uniform geometry and material properties in one direction is
subjected to arbitrarily varying applied loads.
It is then possible to apply the technique of Fourier breakdown in that direction in the same way
as is done in the time dimension in modal analysis, to reduce the three dimensional pro-blem to
one in which variation with respect to only two spatial dimensions need be analyzed.
In this method, which is more economical than a general three dimensional analysis, the applied
load is expressed as a Fourier series in the direction z in which the structure is uniform :
where N is the number of series terms required to represent the applied load. The original three
dimensional problem is replaced by N two dimensional problems, and clearly the lower the
value of N, the more economical is the technique.
Note:
l This method is applicable only in linear analysis.
Symmetry and antisymmetry
The most general load may be considered as the sum of a symmetric component and an
antisymmetric component, and may therefore be written as the sum of a Fourier cosine series
and a Fourier sine series. This concept is illustrated for the case of an axisymmetric structure in
Figure 8.7.
The same Fourier breakdown is applied to the components U, V and W of the displacement
field to be computed (see Figure 8.8):
The results of the N analyses are the (N S +1) coefficients of the cosine (symmetric) series
and the N coefficients of the sine (antisymmetric) series . The
displacement field may be reconstituted from these results by the routine
TRANSFORMATION OF RESULTS described in Chapter 13.
There are two types of structure subject to harmonic loading: three dimensional solids, and
shells.
It should be noted that harmonic loading may also be considered in thermal analysis ; this option
is described in Chapter 8.6.

© 2019 ESI Group
Analysis of harmonic loading is requested by the command SOLVE HARMONIC, which

defines N static load cases.
Terms of the Fourier series for load and displacement
Axisymmetric structure
Symmetric terms Antisymmetric terms
Figure 8-7
Figure 8-8

© 2019 ESI Group
8.5.1 Harmonic Loading of Shells

Thermoelastic linear analysis of thin shells with either of the following types of geometric
symmetry:
l axisymmetry,
l symmetry of translation for an indefinite distance in one direction (as for plane strain).
Any loading that may be represented by a Fourier series for the structural symmetry concerned
may be considered.
Notes:
l If the applied loads consist of several harmonics, then the SOLVE HARMONIC command is used
to define several load cases. If only one harmonic is to be analyzed, then the usual SOLVE
command is used. The type of harmonic under consideration must be specified in the OPTION
command.
1. Reference Frame
Structures with axial symmetry are defined by their meridian cross section in the plane (x, y),
the y axis being the axis of symmetry and z corresponding to the circumferential direction θ.
Structures with symmetry of translation are defined by their cross section in the plane (x, y)
perpendicular to the direction z of translation.
A point is located by its two Cartesian coordinates (x, y) in the global system.
There are four degrees of freedom per node:

© 2019 ESI Group
4. Systems of Axes
the local coordinates of an element by the three angles
PSI= ψ
THETA= θ
PHI= ϕ
Input Data
OPTION SHELL HARMONIC AXISYMMETRIC SYMMETRIC n --

TRANSLATION ANTISYMMETRIC n
(PERIODICITY = α)
where :
AXISYMMETRIC Indicates axisymmetry.
TRANSLATION Indicates symmetry of translation.
Only one of these two labels should appear in the OPTION command. In the case of
axisymmetry, α is the angle of periodicity, that is the interval of θ for which the Fourier series
expansion is written.
The angles α must be equal to degrees where the integer n is the number of times the pattern of
load repeats itself around the axis of symmetry. By default, n = 1 and α = 360 degrees.
For symmetry of translation, α is the interval of z for which the Fourier series is written, so the
pattern of load repeats itself on each successive interval of length α in the z direction.

© 2019 ESI Group
The labels:
SYMETRIC n specifies the number of the harmonic under consideration.
ANTISYMMETRIC in case of harmonic by harmonic static resolution (SOLVE command) or search for
n eigenmodes (DYNAMIC command).
Without these labels, harmonics are defined for each loading case under the command LOADS
and the command SOLVE HARMONIC must be used..
Note:
l Harmonics n=0 are complementary in degrees of freedom (symmetric UX UY, anti-symmetric
UZ). In search of eigenmodes, they are treated simultaneously.
2. Elements
Number of Geometric
nodes form
1 1 Point 0 Meridian cross-section of bar
One- Meridian cross-section of
1002 2 1
dimensional shell
X9XX any
precalculated.
3. Material Properties: Shell Harmonic Option
a. System of axes
Physical properties of elements are always defined with respect to the local axes, unless angles
of rotation are specified.
PSI=ψ
THETA=θ
PHI=ϕ
b. Non-laminated shells: Shell harmonic option
Isotropic material
E=e Young's modulus
NU = ν Poisson's ration
Anisotropic material

© 2019 ESI Group
TABLE = t specifies the number t of the table defined elsewhere by the TABLE routine, in which are
specified the values of 21 coefficients of a symmetric matrix D, relating forces σ to strains ε.
σ = D.ε
The numbers above show the order in which the components of D must be defined.
Example
TABLE
t /(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21)
It should be noted that this matrix may be simplified by an appropriate choice of axes, and
indeed this is the only circumstance in which all three angles of rotation of the system of axes
are required.
Note that the strain-displacement relations for axisymmetry are as follows.

© 2019 ESI Group

© 2019 ESI Group
Notes:
l In the case of bars, D is a diagonal matrix but all terms including zero coefficients must still be
given :
l If t < 0 the table t represents the inverse matrix (D)**-1.

c. Laminated composite shell: Shell harmonic option
A laminated composite shell may be viewed as a stack of layers parallel to the mean plane of
the shell-connected grid points. Each layer is described in the positive direction with respect to
the local y axis determined by the right-hand rule from the order of the connected grid points of
the element.
Section in the mean plane View in the tangent plane: fiber axis
X, Y, Z global axes
x, y, z local axes of the element
Xo reference axis on the laminated composite
XLi fiber axis of the layer i.
A laminated composite shell must be declared by the COMPOSITE command and each layer
must be described by the following commands:

© 2019 ESI Group
MATERIAL
ELEMENT m1 TO m2 / COMPOSITE YC = Yc THETA θo
LAYER a1 TO a2 / TABLE t H h RHO ro THETA θi LX lx LZ lz
LAYER b1 TO b2 / E e NU nu H h RHO ro THETA θi LX lx LZ lz
...
ELEMENT n1 TO n2 / ...
...
TABLES
t1 / E1 Et NU1t Glt
t2 / 2l coefficients
...
Description of the labels:

With respect to the ELEMENT command
COMPOSITE Defines the element as a laminated composite shell
YC = yc represents the distance from the mean plane of the connected grid points to the bottom surface
of the laminated composite element (yc < 0). The default value is 0. This distance is measured
on the local y axis.
6-8 nodes element: not significant.
THETA = θo Defines the orientation of the laminated composite element with respect to the local shell
element x axis (around the local y axis).
With respect to the LAYER command (60 layers per element can be treated).
H = h Uniform thickness of the element.
THETA = θi Defines the orientation of the principal material direction in the individual layer X1 with
respect to the laminated composite element Xo axis (around the local y axis).
LX = lx Coefficient of thermal expansion in the principal X1 direction (fiber direction).
LZ = lz Coefficient of thermal expansion in the principal transverse Z1 direction (transversal fiber
direction).

© 2019 ESI Group
E, Nu, TABLE The behavior of the lamina can be:

l isotropic:
l E= eYoung's modulus
l Nu = νPoisson's ratio
l transversally isotropic : a 4 component table t gives the coefficients :
l El Et NUlt Glt
l fully anisotropic : 21 coefficients in TABLE t define the matrix σ =
Dε.
If t is negative, D**-1 is given.
For more details, see 8.3.3.3.3. c laminated 3D SHELL.
d. Section geometry
Section geometry is taken not to vary in the z (or circumferential) direction.
Beams
AX or S = s Cross-sectional area of the beam.
Shells
H=h Thickness of the shell.
e. Thermoelasticity
LX = lx
Coefficients of thermal expansion.
LZ = lz
f. Density
RHO = ρ Density.
4. Constraints: Shell Harmonic Option
Constraints are invariant with respect to the z direction (θ for axisymmetry and z for symmetry
of translation).
UX, UY, UZ, RZ Constrained components of displacement and rotation.
with the line)
ANTISYMMETRY prescribed antisymmetry (corresponds to rigid constraint applied to the degrees of
freedom UX and UZ with respect to the local axes associated with the line)

© 2019 ESI Group
UX) in SHELL HARMONIC AXISYMMETRIC option. In this case the line defined
must be Oy axis.
KY = ky These correpond to the equations :
KZ = kz Fx = Kx (Ux - Uox)
HZ = hz Fy = Ky (Uy - Uoy)
Fz = Kz (Uz - Uoz)
Cz = Kz (Rz - Roz)
KX = kx
KY = ky
Components of stiffness uniformly distributed over elements :
KZ = kz
HZ = hz
d. Axes
PSI = ψ Orientation of axes used (by default, with respect to the global axes).
LOCAL Indicates that the axes used are defined with respect to the local coordinate system of an
element (elastic constraints distributed over elements only).
Note:
l Stiffnesses are always expressed as values per unit of distance in the circumferential direction or
the direction of translation z.
5. Applied Loads: Shell Harmonic Option
The type and number of the harmonic must be defined for each load case in the instruction field
of the load case title subcommand.
By default, if there is only one load case and if no harmonic is defined under OPTION
command, this is taken to be the symmetric zero order harmonic.
The type and number of a harmonic are defined as follows:
SYMMETRIC n
ANTISYMMETRIC n
Note that the results associated with each harmonic are amplitudes.
Forces and tractions are specified as values per unit of distance in the circumferential direction
or the direction of translation z.

© 2019 ESI Group
SW Dead load of the structure (symmetric zero order harmonic only).

GX = gx
Components of acceleration expressed as proportions of acceleration due to gravity, in the
GY = gy
global coordinate directions.
GZ = gz
THERMAL i Thermoelastic analysis. (Temperature gradients cannot be integrated).
CENTRIFUGAL c (cf. 8.4.2.3.5.a).
UX = Uox
UY = Uoy
Components of imposed displacement.
UZ = Uoz
RZ = Roz
c.Forces concentrated at nodes
FX = fx
FY = fy
Components of force and moment.
FZ = fz
CZ = cz
PX = px
Components of pressure (always specified as values per unit of distance in the circumferential
PY = py
direction or the direction of translation).
PZ = pz
e. Initial strains
EX = εx
EY = εy Two longitudinal strains and a curvature.
DZ = χz
In the special case of initial strain due to the effect of temperature, εx and εy are given in terms
of the average temperature Tm of the element and the coefficients of thermal expansion as
follows:
εx = lx. Tm
εy = ly. Tm
f. System of axes
PSI= ψ Orientation of axes used for definition of applied loads.
THETA = θ
PHI = ϕ

© 2019 ESI Group
LOCAL Indicates that the orientation of these axes is defined with respect to the local coordinates of an
element.
Computed Results
Components of displacement, reaction and force are the amplitudes of these quantities for the
harmonic under consideration.
Formulae are given below for the results of an analysis of the two harmonics symmetric n and
antisymmetric n, for points on the meridian plane of an axisymmetric structure which makes an
angle θ with the (x, y) plane.
1. Displacements
Displacements of nodes in the global coordinate directions are:
Symmetric Antisymmetric
UX cos nθ UX sin nθ
UY cos nθ UY sin nθ
UZ sin nθ UZ cos nθ
RZ cos nθ RZ sin nθ

© 2019 ESI Group
2. Reactions
Components of reaction at rigidly constrained nodes, in the global coordinate directions are:
FX cos nθ FX sin nθ
FY cos nθ FY sin nθ
FZ sin nθ FZ cos nθ
CZ cos nθ CZ sin nθ
3. Forces
Calculated results are components with respect to the local coordinates of the element,
computed on the neutral axis at the center. For shell elements the components are the direct and
shear membrane forces NX, NZ and NXZ, and the bending and twisting moments MX, MZ
and MXZ.
For bars it is the axial force NZ only:
NX cos nθ NX sin nθ
NZ cos nθ NZ sin nθ
NXZ sin nθ NXZ cos nθ
MX cos nθ MX sin nθ
MZ cos nθ MZ sin nθ
MXZ sin nθ MXZ cos nθ
Physical values in any specified meridian plane may be obtained by superimposition of
harmonics. For details, see the section FOURIER COMBINATION in Chapter 13 :
transformation of results. Stresses may be computed from forces by using the routine
POSTPROCESSING which is also described in Chapter 13. Note that if h is the thickness of
the shell and v is distance from the middle surface, then:
σx= NX/h + (12MX/h3) v
σz= NZ/h + (12MZ/h3) v
τxz= NXZ/h + (12MXZ/h3) v
Note:
l Forces are not indexed with respect to the axes along which they are defined but to the stress
tensor components which generate to them.

© 2019 ESI Group
8.5.2 Harmonic; Loading of Three Dimensional Solids

Thermoelastic linear analysis of thin-wall and solid structures with either of the following types
of geometric symmetry:
l axisymmetry,
l symmetry of translation for an indefinite distance in one direction (as for plane strain).
Any loading that may be represented by a Fourier series for the structural symmetry concerned
may be considered.
Notes:
l Thin-wall structures are taken to behave as membranes (no bending). Beams run in the direction
of symmetry and may be subjected to axial load only.
l If the applied loads consist of several harmonics then the command SOLVE HARMONIC is used to
define several load cases. If only one harmonic is to be analyzed then the usual SOLVE command
is used. The type of harmonic under consideration must be specified in the OPTION command.
1. Reference Frame
Structures with axial symmetry are defined by their meridian cross section in the plane (x, y),
the y axis being the axis of symmetry and z corresponding to the circumferential direction θ.
Structures with symmetry of translation are defined by their cross section in the plane (x, y)
perpendicular to the direction z of translation.
A point is described by its two Cartesian coordinates (x, y) in the global system.
There are three degrees of freedom per node:
FX = force in the z direction.

© 2019 ESI Group
4. Systems of Axes
the local coordinate system of an element by the three angles
PSI= ψ
THETA= θ
PHI= ϕ
Input Data
OPTION THREE-DIMENSIONAL HARMONIC AXISYMMETRIC SYMMETRIC n --

TRANSLATION ANTISYMMETRIC n
PERIODICITY = α
where:
AXISYMMETRIC Indicates axisymmetry.
TRANSLATION Indicates symmetry of translation.
Only one of these two labels should appear in the OPTION command. In the case of
axisymmetry, α is the angle of periodicity, that is the interval of θ for which the Fourier series
expansion is written.
The angles α must be equal to degrees where the integer n is the number of times the
pattern of load repeats itself around the axis of symmetry. By default, n = 1 and
α = 360 degrees.
For symmetry of translation, α is the interval of z for which the Fourier series is written, so the
pattern of load repeats itself on each successive interval of length α in the z direction.
The labels:
SYMETRIC n specifies the number of the harmonic under consideration.
ANTISYMMETRIC n in case of harmonic by harmonic static resolution (SOLVE command) or search for
eigenmodes (DYNAMIC command).
Without these labels, harmonics are defined for each loading case under the command LOADS
and the command SOLVE HARMONIC must be used..
Note:
l Harmonics n=0 are complementary in degrees of freedom (symmetric UX UY RZ, anti-symmetric
UZ). In search of eigenmodes, they are treated simultaneously.

© 2019 ESI Group
2. Elements
Number of Geometric
nodes form
1002 2
One-
1003 3 1 Cross section of a membrane
dimensional
1004 4
2003 3
2005 5
Cross section of a solid of
2006 6 Triangle 2
revolution or of translation
2009 9
2010 10
2004 4
2007 7 Cross section of a solid of
Quadrangle 2
2008 8 revolution or of translation
2012 12
X9XX any
precalculated.
3. Material Properties: Three Dimensional Harmonic Option
a. System axes
Physical properties of points and one-dimensional elements (bars and membranes) are always
defined with respect to their local axes.
Properties of two dimensional elements are defined with respect to the global axes, unless the
following labels are present:
PSI= ψ
THETA= θ
PHI= ϕ
defining the axes of material properties.
E=e Young's modulus
NU = ν Poisson's ratio.

© 2019 ESI Group
TABLE = t TABLE = t specifies the number t of the table defined elsewhere by the routine TABLE, in
which are specified the values of 21 coefficients of a symmetric matrix D relating stresses σ
to strains ε: σ = D . ε
The numbers above show the order in which the components of D must be defined:
Example
TABLE
t / D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 - -
D33 D34 D35 D36 D44 D45 D46 D55 D56 D66
It should be noted that this matrix may be simplified by an appropriate choice of axes, and
indeed this is the only circumstance in which all three angles of rotation of the system of axes
are required.
Note that the strain-displacement relations for axisymmetry are as follows.
U = UX r ⇒ x
V = UY θ ⇒ z
W = UZ y is the axis of symmetry.
Note:
l For bars and membranes, D is partially empty but all terms including zero coefficients must still
be given:

© 2019 ESI Group
d. Section geometry
Section geometry is taken not to vary in the z direction.
Bars
AX or S = s Cross-sectional area of the bar.
Membranes
If an element is of uniform thickness, then:
H=h specifies that thickness
If the thickness of an element varies along its cross section in the (x, y) plane, then :
H = -t specifies the number of the table in which is defined the thickness of the element at each of its
nodes:
TABLE
t / h1 h2.....hn
where hi is thickness at node i of the element.

The thickness is interpolated over the element using the corresponding discretization law.
e. Surface stresses
If desired, the calculation of stresses on the surface of a solid structure may be requested by
using the label
SURFACE + 1
in the definition of membrane elements which lie on that surface. Stress in these elements is then
calculated not according to the formulae for membranes, but in the same way as for the three
dimensional solid elements to which they are attached. When specifying such membrane
elements over the surface of a structure, their thickness as defined by H = h should be set to
zero (H = h to be omitted), so that no additional contribution is made to structural stiffness.
The label SURFACE is followed by :
l 1if the local y axis of the membrane element is the outward normal to the solid structure ;
l -1if the local y axis of the membrane element is directed into the solid structure.

© 2019 ESI Group
f. Thermoelasticity
LX = lx
Coefficients of thermal expansion in the directions of the axes (local or global)
LY = ly
specified for definition of material properties.
LZ = lz
g. Density
4. Constraints: Three dimensional harmonic option
Constraints are invariant with respect to the z direction (that is θ for axisymmetry and z for
symmetry of translation).
Case of a line:
SYMMETRY prescribed symmetry with respect to the defined line (corresponds to
rigid constraint applied to the degrees of freedom UY and UZ with
respect to the local axes associated with the line)
ANTISYMMETRY prescribed antisymmetry (corresponds to rigid constraint applied to the
degree of freedom UX with respect to the local axes associated with
the line)
Case of a plane:
SYMMETRY prescribed symmetry with respect to the defined plane (corresponds
to rigid constraint applied to the degree of freedom UZ with respect
to the local axes associated with the plane)
ANTISYMMETRY prescribed antisymmetry (corresponds to rigid constraint applied to the
degrees of freedom UX and UY with respect to the local axes
associated with the plane)
KX = kx
KY = ky Components of stiffness concentrated at the nodes.
KZ = kz
KX = kx
Components of stiffness uniformly distributed over
KY = ky
elements.
KZ = kz
d. System of axes

© 2019 ESI Group
PSI = ψ Orientation of axes used (by default, with respect to the global axes).
THETA = θ
PHI = ϕ
LOCAL Indicates that the axes used are defined with respect to the local
coordinates of an element (elastic constraints distributed over
elements only).
5 Applied Loads: Three dimensional harmonic option
The type and number of the harmonic must be defined for each load case in the instruction field
of the load case title sub-command.
By default, if there is only one load case, this is taken to be the symmetric zero order harmonic.
The type and number of a harmonic are defined as follows:
SYMMETRIC n
ANTISYMMETRIC n
Note that the results associated with each harmonic are amplitudes.
Forces and tractions are specified as values per unit of distance in the circumferential direction
or the direction of translation z. (see 8.5.1.3.5)
SW Dead load of the structure (symmetric zero order harmonic
only).
GX = gx
Components of acceleration expressed in the global
GY = gy
coordinate system.
GZ = gz
THERMAL i Thermoelastic analysis.
CENTRIFUGAL (see 8.4.2.3.5.a).
UX= Uox
UY = Uoy Components of imposed displacements
UZ = Uoz
FX = fx Components of force for 1 radian.
FY = fy If the label UNIT is selected, these force components are expressed in
FZ = fz circumferential or translational length.

© 2019 ESI Group
PX = px
Components of pressure (always specified as values per unit of distance
PY = py
in the circumferential direction or the direction of translation).
PZ = pz
e. Initial strains
EX = εx
EY = εy Three longitudinal strains.
EZ = εz
In the special case of initial strain due to the effect of temperature, εx, εy and εz are given in
terms of the average temperature T at each node of an element and the coefficients of thermal
expansion as follows:
εx = lx. T
εy = ly. T
εz = lz. T
Note:
l There may not be more than 10 load cases with thermal loading.
f. NOZZLE load
In "THREE- DIMENSIONAL HARMONIC AXISYMMETRIC" option, the using of a
torque load on a perpendicular section to the symmetry axis is made automatic. The torque load
defined by it following components ; FX, FY, FZ, CX, CY et CZ, is automatically divided in
the form of suitable harmonic and equivalent pressures.
The distance between the determination and the application place of the torque load can be
precised. The suppression of moments generated by shear forces is then automatic.
LOAD
…
i title / NOZZLE L
(elements) / FX = fx . FY=fy CX= cx CY=cy CZ=cz (R)
.....
i load number
title alphanumerical title of the load
L distance measured algebraically along y axis between the torque point
and the modelised point of application
(Elements) whole of skin elements on which the torque load pressed
FX=fx
FY=fy components of force of the torque load T
FZ=fz

© 2019 ESI Group
CX=cx
CY=cy components of couple of the torque load T
CZ=cz
(R) Are the axes with respect to which the torque load can be defined ; by
default, R is the global system.
The NOZZLE D can generate to 6 harmonic loads numbered from i to i+5.
Each load corresponds to each component non null of the equivalent torque load applied to 0.
Consequently, the number of the following load must be chosen according to the number of
loads generated by NOZZLE.
Note:
l For the torsion moment, the UZ degree of freedom must be linked.
g. System of axes
PSI= ψ
THETA = θ Orientation of axes used in the definition of applied loads.
PHI= ϕ
LOCAL Indicates that the orientation of these axes is defined with respect to the
local coordinates of an element.
Computed Results: Three Dimensional Harmonic Option

Components of displacement, reaction and stress are the amplitudes of these quantities for the
antisymmetric n in terms of these components, for points on the meridian plane of an
axisymmetric structure which makes an angle θ with the (x, y) plane.
1. Displacements

© 2019 ESI Group
2. Reactions
Components of reaction at rigidly constrained nodes, in the global coordinate directions are:
3. Stresses
Average stresses in each element are printed in the following order:
(σx, σy, σz, τxy, τxz, τyz)
These calculated results are components with respect to either the global axes for two-
dimensional elements, or the local coordinate axes for one-dimensional elements.
4. STRESS file
This file contains values of stress and strain at a certain number of Gaussian integration points
according to the variation of stress over each element (see Chapter 13.2 : Averaging).
Results of an analysis of the two harmonics symmetric n and antisymmetric n on the meridian
plane of an axisymmetric structure which makes an angle θ with the (x, y) plane are as follows:
SIGX cos nθ SIGX sin nθ
SIGY cos nθ SIGY sin nθ
SIGZ cos nθ SIGZ sin nθ
TAUXY cos nθ TAUXY sin nθ
TAUXZ sin nθ TAUXZ cos nθ
TAUYZ sin nθ TAUYZ cos nθ
Physical values in any specified meridian plane may be obtained by superimposition of
harmonics. For details, see the section FOURIER COMBINATION of Chapter 13:
transformation of results.

© 2019 ESI Group
8.6 Thermal and Electromagnetic Analysis
8.6 THERMAL AND ELECTROMAGNETIC ANALYSIS

8.6.1 Thermal Analysis
SYSTUS can be used to simulate two-dimensional axisymmetric and three-dimensional heat
transfers under permanent or transient conditions. A family of special elements is used for shell-
related problems. Numerous non- linearities, both in terms of thermo- physical properties
(thermal conductivity, density, specific heat or enthalpy as a function of temperature) and
boundary conditions (flux density as a function of wall temperature, radiation in cavities, etc.)
can be reproduced.
Two options are available:
l THERMAL option for conduction problems under stationary or transient conditions,
l THERMAL ENTHALPY option for phase change problems,
Refer to the Heat Transfer Reference Manual for details of utilization of these options.
8.6.2 Electromagnetic Analyses

SYSTUS has 8 options for two- dimensional, axisymmetric and three- dimensional
electromagnetic problems, whether static or dynamic, and linear or non linear.
l The ELECTROSTATIC option is used to study the electrical field created by charges which
are constant in time,

l the ELECTROKINETIC option is used to study the electrical field created by currents or
potential differences which are constant in time,

l the SCALAR MAGNETIC option is used to analyze the electric field and magnetic
induction for magnetostatic applications,

l the PLANE or AXISYMMETRIC MAGNETIC VECTOR option is used to study
distribution of electric field and magnetic induction for magnetostatic or magnetodynamic

(eddy currents, etc.) applications, in the possible presence of moving parts, for two-
dimensional or axisymmetric structures,
l the THREE-DIMENSIONAL MAGNETIC VECTOR option is used to study distribution
of electric field and magnetic induction for magnetostatic or magnetodynamic applications

concerning three-dimensional structures,
l the ELECTRODYNAMIC (previously MAGNETIC FIELD) option is used to analyze
distribution of electric currents for electrodynamic or electrokinetic, two-dimensional or

axisymmetric applications, with the possible presence of moving parts,
l the ELECTROMAGNETIC AV and ELECTROMAGNETIC APSI options are used to
study electrical and magnetic fields for three-dimensional dynamic applications.

Refer to the Electromagnetism Reference manual for details of utilization of these options.

© 2019 ESI Group
8.6 Thermal and Electromagnetic Analysis
8.6.3 Coupled Analyses

SYSTUS includes an option for two- dimensional axisymmetric and three- dimensional
applications requiring strong coupling between thermal and electrokinetic phenomena:
l ELECTROKINETIC-THERMAL option.
Refer to the Heat Transfer Reference manual for details of utilization of this option.
This term is used to describe all problems relating to determination of the temperature field
inside a mechanical part with one, two or three dimensions. These calculations can be made
under permanent or transient conditions, using linear or non-linear equations.
All elements for this option are formulated by the finite element method.

© 2019 ESI Group
8.7 Fluid-Structure Interaction
8.7 FLUID-STRUCTURE INTERACTION

8.7.1 Introduction
The accurate analysis of fluid-structure interaction requires that the volume of fluid itself be
modeled.
In what follows, fluid behavior is taken to be linear, incompressible, non- viscous (so a
displacement potential may be existing).
At a solid node has to correspond only one fluid node. The study of compressible fluids is
possible only for sloshing modes computation (§11.2.2).
In the next two sections are described fluid-structure types in which the elements of previously
described types of structure are complemented by consistent fluid elements. In the last section, is
described a special element to which reference is made in several earlier sections of this chapter.
For the two fluid-structure types, the command SOLVE allows the calculation of the structural
stiffness matrix, the fluid and structure mass matrices and fluid-structure interaction matrix, used
in the calculation of modes of fluid-structure vibration by the command DYNAMIC.

© 2019 ESI Group
8.7.2 Harmonic Loading of Axisymmetric Shells

Calculation of eigenmodes of fluid-structure vibration of axisymmetric thin-wall fluid retaining
structures. Only one face of the structure can be in contact with the fluid.
1. Reference Frame
Axisymmetric structures are defined by their meridian cross section in the (x,y) plane, the y axis
being the axis of symmetry and z corresponding to the circumferential direction.
A point is described by is two Cartesian coordinates (x,y) in the global system.
There are five degrees of freedom at each node:
UZ = displacement in the z direction
UP = fluid potential
(Dynamic pressure p = ρ ω2 UP).
3. Systems of Axes
A rotated system of axes is defined with respect to either the global axes or the local system of
an element by the three angles:
PSI= ψ
THETA= θ
PHI= ϕ
Input Data
OPTION SHELL AXISYMMETRIC FLUID HARMONIC (LABEL) n
where (LABEL) =SYMMETRIC or ANTISYMMETRIC

and n is the number of the harmonic to be considered.
By default, the type and number of harmonic is taken to be symmetric, zero order.

© 2019 ESI Group
2. Elements
Available elements are listed in the following table:
Number of Geometric
nodes form
One-
1002 2 1 Shell of revolution
dimensional
One
1702 2 1 Coupling element
dimensional
2403 3 Triangle 2 Fluid element
2404 4 Quadrangle 2 Fluid element
X9XX any
precalculated.
Note:
l There must be coupling elements over the entire area of contact between the shell and the fluid.
The normal vectors of these elements must be oriented on the outward normal of the fluid
(MODIFY ORIENTATION can be used to modify it).
3. Material Properties: Shell axisymmetric fluid harmonic option
a. System of axes
Material properties of elements are always defined with respect to the local coordinates of
elements, unless labels defining rotation of axes are present:
PSI= ψ
THETA= θ
PHI= ϕ
l Fluid element
RHO = ρf defines density of the fluid
l Coupling element
l Shell element
E=e Young's modulus
RHO =ρs density of the structure

© 2019 ESI Group
c. Anisotropic element (shell elements only)

See section 8.5 for details of input data.
d. Section geometry
l Bar element
AX or S section of bar
l Shell element
H=h thickness of shell
4. Constraints: Shell axisymmetric fluid harmonic option
UX UY UZ RZ constrained components of displacement and rotation at nodes of the
shell
For this option rigid constraints at nodes are specified with respect to
the global axes only.
UP zero potential at a node
In HARMONIC SYMMETRIC 0, UP must be set to zero in at least one point for each
independent fluid volume.
b. Elastic constraints at nodes of the shell
KX = kx
KY = ky
components of stiffness concentrated at nodes.
KZ = kz
HZ = hz
c. Elastic constraints distributed over elements of the shell
KX = kx
KY = ky
components of stiffness uniformly distributed over elements.
KZ = kz
HZ = hz
d. System of axes
PSI = ψ orientation of axes used (by default, with respect to the global axes)
LOCAL indicates that the axes used are defined with respect to the local coordinate
system of an element (elastic constraints distributed over elements only).
5. Applied Loads: Shell axisymmetric fluid harmonic option
l no applied load will be defined in the data file,
l dynamic response calculations by modal method are possible in mono-excitation of supports
(loads defined in PARTICIPATION module).

© 2019 ESI Group
Computed Results: Shell axisymmetric fluid harmonic option

Note:
l Results are printed only for nodes and elements of the shell.
Components of displacement, reaction and force are the amplitudes of these quantities for the
antisymmetric n in terms of these components, for points on the meridian plane which makes an
angle θ with the (x,y) plane.
1. Displacements
RZ cos nθ RZ sin nθ
UP* cos nθ UP* sin nθ
Note:
l UP* reduced pressure
2. Reactions
Components of reactions at rigidly constrained nodes in the global coordinate directions are:
CZ cos nθ CZ sin nθ
FP cos nθ FP sin nθ

© 2019 ESI Group
3. Forces
Calculated forces are components with respect to the local coordinates of the element, computed
on the neutral axis at the center.
The components are the direct and shear membrane forces NX, NZ and NXZ, and the bending
and twisting moments MX, MZ and MXZ:
NX cos nθ NX sin nθ
NZ cos nθ NZ sin nθ
NXZ sin nθ NXZ cos nθ
MX cos nθ MX sin nθ
MZ cos nθ MZ sin nθ
MXZ sin nθ MXZ cos nθ
Note that if h is the thickness of the shell and v is distance from the middle surface then :
σx= NX/h + (12MX/h3) v
σz= NZ/h + (12MZ/h3) v
τxz = NXZ/h + (12MXZ/h3) v
Note:
l Forces are not indexed with respect to the axes along which they are defined but to the stress
tensor components which give rise to them.

© 2019 ESI Group
8.7.3 General Shells

Calculation of eigenmodes of fluid-structure vibration of thin-wall fluid (retaining) structures.
Only one face of the structure can be in contact with the fluid.
1. Frame of Reference
Structures of arbitrary geometric form are defined in (x,y,z) space. A node therefore is described
by its three Cartesian coordinates (x,y,z) in the global system.
There are 7 degrees of freedom at each node:
UZ = displacement in the z direction
RX = rotation about the x axis
RY = rotation about the y axis
UP = fluid potential
(dynamic pressure p = ρ ω2 UP)
3. Systems of Axes
A rotated system of axes is defined with respect to either the global axes or the local system of
an element by the three angles PSI, THETA and PHI.
Input Data
OPTION SHELL FLUID (MULTI)

© 2019 ESI Group
2. Elements
Available elements are listed in the following table:
Number of Geometric
nodes Form
20031 3 Triangle 2 Shell element
2004* 4 Quadrangle 2 Shell element
3004 4 Tetrahedron 3 Solid2 (structure element)
3006 6 Prism 3 Solid† (structure element)
3008 8 Hexahedron 3 Solid† (structure element)
Fluid structure coupling
2703 3 Triangle 2
element
Fluid structure coupling
2704 4 Quadrangle 2
element
3404 4 Tetrahedron 3 Fluid element
3406 6 Prism 3 Fluid element
3408 8 Hexahedron 3 Fluid element
Special structure element of
Not Not
X9XX Any which the stiffness and mass
matrices are precalculated.
One-
1002 2 1 Beam element
dimensional
One-
1702 2 1 Coaxial cylinders
dimensinal
Notes:
l There must be fluid structure coupling elements over the entire area of contact between the shell
and fluid. The normal vectors of these elements must be oriented on the outward normal of the
fluid (MODIFY ORIENTATION can be used to modify it).
l Make sure that the coupling element has the same nodes as the shell element,. This is not
automatically ensured by all the meshing procedures (for example THREE-DIMENSIONAL).
1The elements type 2000 with 3 or 4 nodes can be replaced by elements type 2200, 2300 (SYSPLY), 2400.
The type of elements must be the same for a given model, and defined by the type code of the element.
2These elements can be used in the presence of the MULTI label on the OPTION command.

© 2019 ESI Group
3. Material Properties: Shell fluid option

a. System of axes
Material properties of elements are always defined with respect to the global axes.
For orthotropic shells:
PSI = ψ specifies the orientation of the axes of orthotropy with respect to the local coordinate system
of an element.
l Fluid element
l Coupling element
l Shell (and volumic) element
E=e Young's modulus
RHO =ρs density of the structure
c. Orthotropic material (shell elements only)
See Chapter 8.3 for details of input data.
d. Section geometry
l Shell element
H=h thickness of shell
4. Constraints: Shell fluid option
UX UY UZ constrained components of displacement and rotation
RX RY RZ For this option, rigid constraints at nodes are specified
with respect to the global axes only.
UP zero potential at a node.
UP must be set to zero in at least one point for each
independent fluid volume.

© 2019 ESI Group
KX = kx components of stiffness concentrated at nodes.

KY = ky
KZ = kz
HX = hx
HY = hy
HZ = hz
(It is possible to impose an elastic constraint ku on the UP potential for a node belonging only to
fluid elements. The syntax is UP PSI ku).
KX = kx Components of stiffness uniformly distributed over elements
KY = ky
KZ = kz
d. System of axes
PSI = ψ orientation of axes used (by default, with respect to the global axes)
THETA= θ
PHI= ϕ
LOCAL The orientation is specified with respect to the local system of the element.
(For elastic constraints distributed over elements only).
5. Applied Loads: Shell fluid option
l only force type loads can be defined in the data file (useful in SOLVE STIFFNESS),
l dynamic response calculations by modal method are possible in mono-excitation of supports
(loads defined in PARTICIPATION module) and for force type loads.
Computed Results
Note:
l results are printed only for nodes and elements of the structure.
1. Displacements
UX, UY, UZ Components of displacement and rotation at each mode, with respect
RX, RY, RZ to the global axes
UP* reduced pressure

© 2019 ESI Group
2. Reactions
FX, FY, FZ Components of reaction at rigidly constrained nodes, with respect to
CX, CY, CZ the global axes.
FP Potential reaction which corresponds to mass imbalance of the node
3. Forces (in shell elements)
NX NY NXY normal and shear membrane forces
MX MY MXY bending and twisting moments
These forces are calculated at the center of each element, components being with respect to the
local coordinate directions of the element.

© 2019 ESI Group
8.7.4 Coaxial Cylinders

Introduction
This section describes the special element used to model fluid structure interaction between two
coaxial cylinders, in the context of beam bending theory.
This element is used in BEAM and SHELL type structures. The interaction modeled is inertial,
and this element is used in dynamic and transient analysis.
Formulation
Given the special nature of this element, its theoretical basis is described here in detail.
a. Assumptions
Let us consider two coaxial cylinders, separated by a fluid. The cylinders are taken to be of
infinite length, and are supposed to be perfectly rigid. The fluid is taken to be incompressible.
As the cylinders are subjected to small movements in the plane perpendicular to their axes, the
fluid is displaced and exerts pressure on the cylinders.
The purpose of the analysis is to determine the forces acting upon the cylinders as a
consequence of this pressure.
R1, R2 radii of cylinders

h length in the axial direction of the "slice" of the assembly considered
ρ density of the fluid
p pressure of the fluid
ün acceleration normal to the boundary of the fluid
ü1, Cartesian components of acceleration of the inner cylinder
ü2, Cartesian components of acceleration of the outer cylinder
The cylinders being supposed to be of infinite length, the fluid is taken to move in a plane,
subject to the equation (non-viscous, irrotational and incompressible):
∆p = 0 (1)

© 2019 ESI Group
where ∆ is the Laplacian operator in two-dimensions and the boundary conditions on the
cylinders (fluid-structure continuity) :
∂p/∂n = - ρ ün (2)
In polar coordinates these equations become:
(3)
(4)
b. Determination of the variation of pressure

The general solution of equation (3) is:
p = po + (ar + (b/r)) cosθ + (cr + (d/r)) sinθ (5)
Equating coefficients of cosθ and sinθ in equations (4) yields formulae for a, b, c and d.
The constants a and b are given by:
(6)
c and d are obtained by replacing u1 and u2 by v1 and v2 in equation (6). The final result is:
(7)

© 2019 ESI Group
c. Forces exerted on cylinders

The cylinders being taken to be of infinite length, a "slice" of length h in the axial direction is
considered. The forces exerted on the cylinders within this slice due to fluid pressure are:
(8)
Therefore:
(9)
Given that:
(10)
We have:
(11)
Expressions are similarly obtained for the components fy1, fx2 and fy2.
Note:
l The pressure po remains undetermined but plays no part in the calculation of F1 and F2 (its
resultant being zero) ; only the component which varies with θ causes interaction. The condition
that the volume of the fluid remains constant is satisfied, because the cylinders are taken to be
perfectly rigid. The relations between u and v components of acceleration are eliminated.

© 2019 ESI Group
d. Computation of the mass matrix

In matrix notation, equation (11) is of the form
(12)
where
(13)
This matrix is treated as an additional mass matrix linking the translational degrees of freedom
perpendicular to the common axial direction of the two cylinders.
Note:
l The sum of the coefficients of the matrix M defined by equation (13) equals the total mass of the
fluid:
(14)
Also, the equations of motion of a cylinder immersed in an infinite volume of fluid are obtained
by letting R2 tend to infinity (u2 and v2 ---> 0).
This yields the results:
(15)
The additional mass is seen to be equal to that of the displaced fluid.

References
T.L. Geiger : "Hydrodynamic forces due to ideal fluid between whirling cylinders".
WEMD Engineering Memorandum n° 4261
8 mars 1971
O.C. Zienkiewicz : The Finite Element Method. 3rd edition Chap. 20.3

© 2019 ESI Group
Input Data
The cylinders are defined as beam elements (1002) with coincident neutral axes, so with nodes
which are coincident in space (1,4), (2,5) and (3,6); each of these pairs of coincident nodes is
connected by a fluid element (1702).
Each element with the 1702 form must be defined so that the first node corresponds to the inner
cylinder (radii R1) and the second node to the outer cylinder (radii R2).
Material properties:
H length in the axial direction of the "slice" considered. This data is necessary because the
length of 1002 beam element is not known by element.
1702
DIAH = D2 diameter of outer cylinder
DIAM = D1 diameter of inner cylinder
RHO = ρ specific mass of fluid
Axes:
The default axis of the cylinders is Z global for 3D and Y global for 2D structures. This default
value can be modified by the labels PSI, THETA and PHI.

© 2019 ESI Group
8.8 Special Elements
8.8 SPECIAL ELEMENTS

8.8.1 Element Type 9 (X9XX)
Element type X9XX is used to describe:
l tabulated element (SHAPE =0),
l shell/solid transition element (SHAPE = 1 or 11),
l beam/solid transition element (SHAPE = 2 or 12),
l transition element (SHAPE = 3 or 13),
l contact element (SHAPE = 4 or 5),
l TIED element (SHAPE = 8).
l RIGID BODY element (SHAPE = 9 or 19)
The SHAPE is defined in the MATERIAL PROPERTIES.

The TYPE (9) can also be defined in the MATERIAL PROPERTIES.

© 2019 ESI Group
Tabulated Element (X9XX, SHAPE = 0)

Introduction
The elementary matrices (stiffness, mass, damping) of a tabulated element may be read either
from the standard input stream by the routine TABLE or from a file. If the matrix is read from a
file, then it is also possible to read from that file the associated load vectors.
To write to file the stiffness matrix and any load vectors of such an element one may use the
routines SUBSTRUCTURE (see chapter 10), which computes the partially reduced stiffness
matrix rows and columns of which are indexed on interface nodes of a substructure, and
EXTRACT BINARY (see section 7.2.4) which enables that matrix to be accessed.
To write to file simultaneously the stiffness matrix and any load vectors of such an element, and
the mass matrix, the routine MODES REDUCTION (cf. 11.2.6.4) must be used.
Use of Tabulated Elements
Tabulated elements may be used under the commands SOLVE, DYNAMIC and under
TRANSIENT (linear and non linear).
A tabulated element must be defined under the command DEFINITION.
Its type must be 9, that is the element type code is of the form:
X9XX
where
X is the dimension (1, 2 or 3)
XX is the number of nodes of the element. (XX≤20).
Properties of the element are specified:
l by a table number,
l possibly a system of axes (R),
l damping material properties α and β who eventually add to those of the table t3.
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
(element list) / TABLE t, (E n) (R) (ALPHA a) (BETA β)
a. Stiffness, mass and damping matrices defined by routine TABLE

t>0
t is a six-digit positive integer which defines the numbers of three tables t1, t2 and t3 :
t1 which comprises the tens and units digits of t, is the number of the table in which the stiffness
matrix is stored.

© 2019 ESI Group
t2 which comprises the thousands and hundreds digits of t, is the number of the table in which the
mass matrix is stored.
t3 which comprises the hundreds thousand and tens thousand digits, is the number of the table in
which the damping matrix is stored.
TABLE
t1 / (mnij, Kmnij), etc ...
t2 / (mnij, Mmnij), etc ...
t3 / (mnij, Cmnij), etc ...
Only the upper triangle of matrix coefficients need be given. The table consists of pairs of
terms: the first of a pair specifies the location in the matrix of the coefficient, the second its
value.
The first term of a pair is coded as follows:
It is permissible also to specify a system of axes:

PSI = ψ
orientation with respect to the global axes, of the axes with respect to which coefficients of
THETA = θ
the stiffness and mass matrices are defined.
PHI = ϕ
Example
[ K ]

© 2019 ESI Group
Notes:
l Since m and n must be single digits, the number of nodes of the element may not exceed 9.
l Caution: stiffness matrix of an element is normally singular. If not, the element produces a
constraint with the outer medium.
l If the material properties contain G label , then the matrices associated with the element
will not be symmetrised. In this case, it is impossible to define a system of axes. A non
symmetrical solver is required under SOLVE and TRANSIENT commands; under the DYNAMIC
command, only the PSEUDO MODAL and MODES COMPLEX modulus are available.
b. Stiffness, mass and damping matrices defined in input file
t<0
t is a six digit integer preceded by a minus sign, which defines the numbers (t1, t2 and t3) of
three logical units assigned to the files in which the matrices are stored:
t1 which comprises the tens and units digits of t, is the logical unit number assigned to the file in
which the stiffness matrix is stored.
t2 which comprises the thousands and hundreds digits of t, is the logical unit number assigned to
the file in which the mass matrix is stored.
t3 which comprises the hundred thousand and ten thousand digits, is the number of the table in
which the damping matrix is stored.
n is the sequence number, specified after the label ELEMENT, of the stiffness and mass
matrices in the files. This number is defined at the time of file creation, either by the
command:
EXTRACT BINARY ELEMENT i j k ... (see section 7.2.5)
or by the command :
MODE ... REDUCTION
(under DYNAMIC : see section 11.2.1 - Lanczos SUBSPACE method with GUYAN option)
By default, n = 1.
The name by default of the files is RIGGEN and MASGEN. The file name can't exceed 8
characters.
Notes:
l Under SOLVE and TRANSIENT LINEAR, the number of load cases associated with the element
must be the same as that of the problem under consideration.
l Under TRANSIENT NON LINEAR, the number of load cases may be 0 or 1.

© 2019 ESI Group
l Before calling command SOLVE or TRANSIENT, it is necessary to form the association between
the numbers t1 and t2, and the files in which the stiffness and mass matrices are stored, by means
of the command ASSIGN (see section 2.3):
l ASSIGN t1 (file name) BINARY (for example: ASSI t1 RIGGEN.TIT BINARY)
ASSIGN t2 (file name) BINARY
l If this element has any vectors of such an element under TRANSIENT, they will be multiplied by
the TIME function of the corresponding load. Under TRANSIENT NON LINEAR, the FUNCTION
command is necessary.
l The matrices of the file can be non-symmetrical. A non-symmetrical solver is then required. In the
DYNAMIC routine, only the PSEUDO MODAL and MODES COMPLEX modulus are available.
Shell/Solid Transition Element (X9XX, SHAPE = 1 or 11)

Introduction
These elements are used to connect shell elements to solid elements in order to transmit the
rotations of the shells to the solid structure.
Use of Shell/Solid Transition Elements
Shell/solid transition elements are available under SOLVE and TRANSIENT commands.
They can be defined under DEFINITION procedure, or created automatically with the
COMPATIBILITY command (8.10.4).
If they are defined under DEFINITION, they must bear the TYPE 9 and the material property
SHAPE = 1 or 11.
The element codes are the following:
2903 To connect a linear or quadratic shell element using a penalty method
2904 (SHAPE = 1).
2904 To connect a linear or quadratic shell element using Lagrangian multipliers
2905 method (SHAPE = 11).
Nodes of the element are:
l the nodes of the shell edge connected to the solid (2 or 3 nodes),
l node of the solid to transmit the rotations,
l possibly the Lagrange node (SHAPE = 11).
Under DEFINITION, the following material properties are defined:
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
(elements) / (TYPE = 9) SHAPE = 1 or 11 E = e
where
e: Penalty coefficient homogeneous to a Young modulus (by default, 1000*200000).

© 2019 ESI Group
Beam/Solid Transition Element (X9XX, SHAPE = 2 or 12)

Introduction
These elements are used to connect beam elements to solid elements in order to transmit the
rotations of the beams to the solid structure.
Use of Beam/Solid Transition Elements
Beam/solid transition elements are available under SOLVE and TRANSIENT commands.
COMPATIBILITY command (8.10.4).
SHAPE = 2 or 12.
The element code is the following: 29NN
l the nodes of the solid faces which have in their edges, the edge constituted by the node
connecting the beam and the solid node on which the forces due to rotations are transmitted.
The numbering of faces begins by the node of the beam,
l node of the solid to transmit the rotations,
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
(elements) / (TYPE = 9) SHAPE = 2 or 12 E = e
where
e: Penalty coefficient homogeneous to a Young modulus (by default,
1000*200000).

© 2019 ESI Group
Transition Element (X9XX, SHAPE = 3 or 13)

Introduction
These elements are used to constrain a node to be projected on an element.
Use of transition elements
Beam/solid transition elements are available under SOLVE and TRANSIENT commands.
ASSOCIATE (6.3.8) or REMESH (6.3.9) commands.
SHAPE = 3 or 13.
The element code is built as follows: D9NN
D: Dimension of the element where the constraint node is projected.
NN: Element number of nodes plus 1 (noeud to be projected), plus 1 if the
Langragian multipliers method is used (SHAPE = 13).
l the nodes of the element where the constraint node is projected,
l the constraint node,
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
(elements) / (TYPE = 9) SHAPE =3 or 13 E = k --
KX = kx KY = ky KZ = kz IX = ix IY = iy --
IZ = iz PROPORTIONAL p EXTRACT e
Where
k: Absolute or proportional (if ) penalty coefficient for all the dof.
If the value of k is negative, it refers to a time function with number –
k. In this case the value of the penalty coefficient is directly read in
the table.
and if k = 0
kx, ky, kz, ix, Absolute or proportional (if ) penalty coefficient for each the
iy, iz: dof.
If the value is negative, it refers to a time function. In this case the
value of the penalty coefficient is directly read in the table.

© 2019 ESI Group
p: Proportional coefficient flag. Only available with TRANSIENT

NON LINEAR analysis.
p ≠ 0 : proportional penalty.
e: Printout level:
0: no printout.
1: local coordinates of the projected node.
2: coefficient of the imposed linear relation.
3: penalty coefficient.
Note:
l Reaction to stress is stored in the FORCE file.

© 2019 ESI Group
Special Contact Element (X9XX, SHAPE = 4 or 5)

Principle
New contact elements SLIDE PLANE are used to model the 3D contact between deformable
solids.
"SLIDE PLANE" elements are a general implementation of the two nodes contact elements
used with the medium "INTERFACE".
These elements accept non-coincident meshes for the CONTACTOR and TARGET solids,
and are used to model small relative displacements between CONTACTOR and SOLID.
"SLIDE PLANE" elements assume some simplifying hypotheses, which improve the efficiency
of the numerical solution:
l Sliding is done on a plane,
l The plane normal is defined explicitly.
In addition, contact relations are imposed by the penalty method and the updated Lagrangian
method is not applied.
"SLIDE PLANE" elements can be created either by the procedure ASSOCIATE (cf. 6.3.8.2)
or under the procedure DEFINITION as explained in the following paragraphs.
Geometrical Characterization
Let two deformable solids S1 , S2 likely to get into contact with each other, and let Σ1 a part of
the outer surface of S1 which can get into contact with Σ2 a part of the outer surface of S2.
The surface Σ 1 , called contactor surface, is geometrically defined by a group of surface
elements M1 or by a group of nodes N 1, deducted from the previous group M1. The surface Σ2,
called target surface, is geometrically defined by a group of surface elements M2 . (See Figure
8.9).
The contact is modeled by a group of contact elements obtained by the association of a
contactor node belonging to N 1 with a surface element belonging to the group M 2 in
accordance with a geometrical criterion (orthogonal projection, minimum distance). Contact
element is made of nn + 1 nodes:
l The nodes of the target element provide the "nn" first nodes of the contact element and define
the contact surface of the element nodes (Σ),

l The contactor node provide the last node (order number nn + 1). This node is liable to be on
the contact surface Σ or outside this one.

Figure 8.10 shows the geometry of the various contact elements obtained:
l 4-node and 5-node linear contact elements,
l 7-node and 9-node linear contact elements.

© 2019 ESI Group
Figure 8.9
Figure 8.10
Utilization (under DEFINITION)
Under DEFINITION procedure, the command ELEMENT defines contact elements by their
nodes and by their code type.
If the contact elements are defined under DEFINITION, they must bear the type 9 and the
material property SHAPE = 4 or 5.

© 2019 ESI Group
ELEMENT
number /n1 n2 …nNN TYPE 29NN
Under DEFINITION procedure, the command MATERIAL PROPERTIES defines the

physical and numerical properties of the contact element.
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
number / LEVEL 1or 2 SHAPE 4 or 5 E k --
PROPORTIONAL p PRECISION β TOLER γ --
GAP α EPSI ε MODEL m TABLE t H j EXTRACT x --
COEF 1 VARI v FT f
LEVEL 1 Level 1 SLIDE PLANE element.

LEVEL 2 Level 2 SLIDE PLANE element.
SHAPE 4 or 5 Indicates that the special element type 9, is a contact element
SLIDE PLANE.
If SHAPE = 4, the normal to the sliding plane is defined by the
undeformed geometry.
If SHAPE = 5, the normal to the sliding plane is defined by the
previous deformed geometry (obtained with the previous load
increment).
E k PROPORTIONAL p
if p = 0, normal stiffness is kN = k. By default, k = 107
if p ≠ 0, normal stiffness is proportional to the contactor local

stiffness, proportional coefficient is k. By default, k = 1.
A negative value –k (k: positive integer) specifies the table
number k managing the automatic penalty factor adjustment is
p=0 (or the proportional coefficient adjustment, if p ≠ 0):
TABLE
k / k0 gmin gmax
k0 is the initial penalty coefficient,
gmin the minimal authorized penetration,
gmax the maximum authorized penetration.
If gt is the penetration at time t, the penalty coefficient k evolves
during two increments t and t+Δt in order to satisfy the relation
gmin≤ gt ≤ gmax.
PRECISION β Precision of the searching algorithm which determines the
position of the projection point on the target element.
By default, β = 10-3 (relative value).

© 2019 ESI Group
TOLER γ Tolerance to the loss of contact during sliding.

If contact between C and its associated target
element is maintained, else the contact does not occur.
By default, γ = 0,05.
GAP α Maximum distance authorized between the node to be projected

C and center of gravity G of the target surface element.
By default, α = 104.
EPSI ε Value of the adjustment parameter in the normal contact force –
normal strain relation. By default, ε = 0.
MODEL m Mechanical model for contact. By default, m = 3.

m = 1 sticking contact in the normal and tangential directions,
m = 2 sticking contact in the tangential direction,
m = 3 sliding contact without friction,
m = 4 contact with Coulomb's friction, friction threshold
m = 5 contact with Tresca's friction, constant friction threshold
m = 7 contact with Coulomb-Orowan's friction, friction

threshold: if .

© 2019 ESI Group
TABLE t Friction properties table:
gives the value of the contact tangential stiffness

. By default .
H j Value of the gap between contactor and target surfaces.
Label H can be used to determine the contact between two shells
modeled by their mean surface or by an off-center surface.
Example: two shells are modeled by their mean surface, contact
occurs when , hence the value .

Defines the offset (or gap) between the two surfaces, by default,
j=0. This option is only defined for small relative displacement in
the contact area, so it is only available for level 1 elements.
EXTRACT x x gives the level of information during the computation.

By default, x = 0, no information are displayed.
x = 1displays strains and contact forces at the end of each
increment.
x = 2 displays strains and contact forces at iteration
x = 3 displays detailed information at each iteration
(supplementary printout: penalty, projection point…)
COEF 1 Activate the initial gap ( ) to be taken into account in the
thickness computation. , by default
COEF=0 and .
VARI v f is a positive integer defining a time-space table of the offset.
The value ofthe offset is multiply by the value of the table
FT f f is a positive integer defining a time table of the offset. The

value of the offset is multiply by the value of the table
.
If FT and VARI are defined,

© 2019 ESI Group
The normal contact force is then compute as , When COEF 1 option is

activated, taking into account the initial gap is identical as compute the normal contact force as :
we get a displacement formulation of the gap.
Utilization (under TRANSIENT NONLINEAR)
Under the command TRANSIENT NONLINEAR, it is advisable to use the following
parameters:
l PRECISION FORCE (value)
to control the convergence of the incremental computation in force.

l ALGORITHM OPTIMIZE 1
to update the left-hand matrix at each iteration of the incremental computation.

l METHOD NON SYMMETRICAL
in the presence of friction (non-symmetrical right-hand matrix).

In addition, it is necessary to use the command BEHAVIOR PLASTIC whatever mechanical
contact model used.
Results
In the FORCE record of the TRANSIENT file, various information are stored. Some are state
or history variables, they are especially useful for the computation execution, others are directly
exploitable by a post-processing procedure (PRINT TRANSIENT, CURVE TRANSIENT,
CONVERT then DISPLAY).
l Components 1 to 3: contact force in the local dual base
l Components 4 to 6: contact strains in the local curvilinear base

l Components 7 to 8: non-reversible sliding strains in the local dual base
l Components 11 to 13: contact force in the local orthonormal reference frame
l Components 14 to 15: curvilinear abscissas of the contact starting point
l Component 20: contact state = 1 if contact occurs, state = 0 else
l Components 21 to 23first vector of the curvilinear base in the global reference frame
l Components 24 to 26: normal vector in the global reference frame
l Component 30: local stiffness of the solid contactor.

© 2019 ESI Group
The procedure CONVERT applied to the TRANSIENT file gives the contact force in the
global reference frame, at nodes of the contactor surface. Contact forces are visualized by
selecting the dataset FORCE_CONTACT.EL, and contact elements SLIDE PLANE, contactor
surface elements, and target surface elements.

© 2019 ESI Group
TIED Element (SHAPE = 8)

Introduction
The TIED elements are contact element with lever arm. In fact, the contact is supposed to be
established and unbreakable as a mesh association, and the distance between the meshes is
conserved. In addition a lever arm is considered between the source node and the target
element.
These elements could be created by the ASSOCIATE procedure (see also 6.8.3) or by the
DEFINITION procedure as described in the next paragraphs.
Use of TIED Element
TIED elements are available under TRANSIENT NON LINEAR
They can be defined under the DEFINITION procedure, or created automatically with the
ASSOCIATE (6.3.8) commands.
Under the DEFINITION procedure, the command ELEMENT defines TIED elements by their
nodes and by their code type:
ELEMENT
number /n1 n2 …nNN TYPE 29XX
Under the DEFINITION procedure, the command MATERIAL PROPERTIES defines the
properties of the elements.
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
number / E k or KZ kn KX kt IZ krn IX krt SHAPE 8
Ek The global penalty coefficient. If k is negative, it refer to a

function of time with the number -k in which the coefficient
is read directly.
KZ kn The directional penalty coefficients. kn is the normal penalty
KX kt and kt is the tangential penalty for the translations. In case of
shell computation, it is also possible to define krn and krt
IZ krn IX krt which are respectively the normal penalty and the tangential
penalty for rotations. If the value is negative, it refer to a
function of time in which the coefficient is read directly.
SHAPE 8 Indicates that the type 9 special element is a TIED element.
Remark:
l These elements are only available for small displacements and small rotations.

© 2019 ESI Group
RIGID BODY Element (SHAPE=9 or 19)

Introduction
These elements are used to represent the rigid body behavior. In fact, these elements allow to
setup relations between a set of nodes. To represent a rigid body with any number of nodes, the
method used is to defined special bars relating each node of the initial set to a reference node
located at the barycenter of the set.
Two kinds of behavior defined in the material properties are available:
l LEVEL=1: a true rigid body behavior. The slave node motion is computed from the master
node’s rotation and translation with a rigid bar formulation.
l LEVEL=3: the motion of the master node is a weighted average of the motions of all the
slave nodes.
Remark: this is not a ‘’rigid’’ element but more an interpolation element that does not add
stiffness to the structure (if used correctly). A typical application is to apply global force or
global torque at the master node instead of defining at each slave node.
Use of RIGID SOLID Elements
The rigid solid can then be fully described by the reference node’s translations and rotations. In
MIXING OPTION, the node holds naturally 6 degrees of freedom. In TWO-DIMENSIONAL
or THREE- DIMENTIONAL options, an additional node should be created at the same
location as the reference node in order to hold the rotation degrees of freedom. If SHAPE=9 a
penalty formulation is used to imposed the relation between dof, if SHAPE=19, then the
formulation used is a Lagrangian one and another additional node is then required.
Element types and numbering of nodes for rigid solid:
Mixing option 2D or 3D option
Penalty Lagrangian Penalty Lagrangian
formulation formulation formulation formulation
Element 1902 1903 1903 1904
Type
Node 1 Reference node Reference node Reference node Reference node
Node 2 Slave node Slave node Slave node Slave node
Node 3 Lagrange node Reference Reference
Rotation node Rotation node
Node 4 Lagrange node
Each bar has to share the same material properties.
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
(number) / SHAPE 9 or 19 LEVEL 1 E (or PROPORTIONNAL) k (or KX kx KY ky KZ
kz IX ix IY iy IZ iz) (R or LOCAL) DEPENDS d

© 2019 ESI Group
Ek is the global penalty (or adaptation in Lagrangian method)

coefficient.
KX KY KZ IX IY IZ are the penalty coefficients for each
dof.
If negative it refers to a temporal function.
PROPORTIONNAL means that the penalty factor depends
on the local rigidity, it is only available for penalty method.
R or LOCAL R is the classic SYSTUS frame definition using PSI,
THETA and PHI or allows to define the properties in the
local frame of the bar.
DEPENDS d Code for activating or deactivating specific dof (by default
all are activated ie d=63) coded on 6 bits for each 6 dof. If
the bit is equal to 1, the dof is activated: (UX:1 UY:2 UZ: 4
RX:8 RY: 16 RZ: 32)
Remark:
l these elements are only available for small displacements and small rotations
Use of AVERAGING TYPE SOLID Elements
For this type of element, the element creation is a bit different. First, no penalty method is
available, only the Lagrangian method. In mixing option, all the bars MUST share both the
reference node and the additional Lagrangian node. In 2D or 3D option, two Lagrangian nodes
are needed to hold all the available degrees of freedom, all bar must then share the reference
node, the rotation node and the two Lagrangian nodes.
Element types and numbering of nodes for averaging type solid:
Mixing option 2D or 3D option
Lagrangian formulation Lagrangian formulation
Element Type 1903 1905
Node 1 Reference node Reference node
Node 2 Slave node Slave node
Node 3 Lagrange node Reference Rotation node
Node 4 Lagrange node
Node 5 Lagrange rotation node
Each bar can have its own material properties (only ‘COEF should change between bars)
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
(number) / SHAPE 19 LEVEL 3 E k (or KX kx KY ky KZ kz IX ix IY iy IZ iz) (R or
LOCAL) DEPENDS d COEF r
SHAPE 19 MANDATORY, to use the Lagrangian formulation.

© 2019 ESI Group
Ek is the global adaptation coefficient.

KX KY KZ IX IY IZ are the adaptation coefficient for each
dof.
If negative it refers to a temporal function.
R or LOCAL R is the classic SYSTUS frame definition using PSI,
THETA and PHI or allows to define properties in the local
frame of the bar.
COEF r It defines the weighting factor of the bar. By default: 1/n
with n the number of nodes of the same Averaging solid.
DEPENDS d Code for activating or deactivating specific dof (by default
all are activated ie d=63) coded on 6 bits for each 6 dof. If
the bit is equal to 1, the dof is activated: (UX: 1 UY: 2
UZ: 4 RX:8 RY: 16 RZ: 32).
Remark:
l these elements are only available for small displacements and small rotations.

© 2019 ESI Group
8.8.2 Element Defined by User Supplied Subroutine (type 8)

Introduction
Elements may be programmed by the user and loaded into SYSTUS.
This allows the use within SYSTUS of the users own routines, whilst retaining the possibility
of using standard elements of the system.
Details of the procedure for loading user-supplied subroutines, depending upon the system
under which SYSTUS is implemented, are given in the Installation Manual.
The subroutine name and parameter list are predetermined according to whether a linear or non-
linear element is be defined:
l GUMAIL for linear finite elements
(command SOLVE)
l GPMAIL for non-linear finite elements
(command TRANSIENT NON LINEAR)

These two subroutines and their parameter lists are described later.
Use of User-Supplied Element

The element must be defined under the command DEFINITION and must be type 8, with the
element type code of the form:
X8XX
where:
The element may be assigned physical properties and if desired, applied loads.
Linear Finite Element

GUMAIL (S,T,SS,IST,JST,SM,SP,U,XYZ,IBLA,CMAIL,CMAT)
Arguments
(output)
Real * 8
IST(5)= return condition code for each of the matrices(output)

JST= binary matrix calculation request code(input) Integer
U= displacements at nodes of the element(input) Real
XYZ= coordinates of nodes of the element(input) Real

© 2019 ESI Group
IBLA = BLANK common

CMAIL = COMMAIL common See Chapter 18
CMAT = COMMAT common
Non-Linear Finite Element

GPMAIL
(S,T,SS,SM,SP,U,XYZ,IST,JST,IBLA,CMAIL,CMAT,CTRA,INTFIO)
Arguments
S Stiffness (output)
T Load vector * Real *8
matrices to be calculated
SS Stresses
(except SS : Real*4)
SM Masses
Sp Damping or buckling
IST(5)= return condition code for each of the matrices(output)

JST= binary matrix calculation request code(input) Integer
U= displacements at nodes of the element(input) Real*8l
XYZ= coordinates of nodes of the element(input) Real
IBLA = BLANK common

CMAIL = COMMAIL common See Chapter 18
CMAT = COMMAT common

CTRA = COMMTRA
* Load vector corresponds to F - SU with
F : vector of external loads.
INTFIO = not used
Details
Coding of JST
1st bit (20) computation of stiffness requested
2nd bit (21)computation of load vector requested
3rd bit (22)computation of stresses requested
4th bit (23)computation of mass requested
5th bit (24)computation of damping or buckling requested

© 2019 ESI Group
Coding of IST
IST(1) = 1 Stiffness has been computed
IST(2) = 1 Load vector has been computed
IST(3) = 1 Stresses have been computed
IST(4) = 1 Mass has been computed
IST(5) = 1 Damping or Buckling has been computed.
Structure of Matrices
FORTRAN DIMENSION declaration for matrices :
DIMENSIONS(*), T(*), SS(*), SM(*), SP(*)
S (KP, KP, NN, NN)
SM (KP, KP, NN, NN)
SP (KP, KP, NN, NN)
T (KP, KPPR, NN)
U (KP, KPPR, NN)
SS (KPC, KPPR)
or :
KP = number of degrees of freedom per node = IBLA(131)
KPPR = number of loads = IBLA(121)
KPC = number of stress components per element = IBLA(143)
NN = number of nodes per element = CMAIL(26)

© 2019 ESI Group
8.8.3 Special Constraint Element (type 6)

Principle
The purpose of this element is to apply a linear or non-linear relation between the same degrees
of freedom of two nodes. It can be used to simulate complex mechanisms comprising springs,
dampers and contacts. The element generates stiffness and damping matrices. Forces in the
element are calculated.
A constraint between the same degrees of freedom of two nodes is characterized by a stiffness
matrix with the following form:
(1)
If the constraint is non-linear, k depends on the relative displacement of the two nodes.
In the same way, a damper constraining the corresponding degrees of freedom of two nodes
produces a damping matrix with the form:
(2)
If the damper is non-linear, c depends on the relative velocity of the two nodes.
The force in the direction of the stiffness constraint is given by:
Where
l x : direction of the constraint,
l kx : stiffness in the direction of the constraint,
l x1, x2 : coordinates of the two nodes in the direction of the constraint,
l ux1, ux2 : displacement of the two nodes in the direction of the constraint,
l jx0 : initial gap between the two nodes in the direction of the constraint.
The computed stress is static, and is equal to the constraining force for a static computation.
Utilization
The special constraint element is a type 6 two-node element (code 1602). Its physical properties
are defined in the general reference frame, or a local reference frame, using the DEFINITION
procedure.
This element is applicable for linear computation using the SOLVE, DYNAMIC and
TRANSIENT LINEAR procedures, or non-linear computation using TRANSIENT NON
LINEAR.

© 2019 ESI Group
Caution:
l Elements of length different from zero do not impose a constraint stiffness in the direction defined
by the two nodes. Elements which do not have the same axes at end nodes produce a non-singular
stiffness matrix. In addition to the constraint stiffness, these elements impose a constraint on the
outer medium.
a. Physical properties
MATERIALS
(elements) / (K = k), (I = i), (A = c), (L= j0) (ALPHA α ) - -
(PROPOR=p) (TF=tfusion)
where:
(K = k) List of labels (KX, KY, KZ) and values (kx, ky, kz) defining the
translation stiffness of the constraint, in the geometrical reference
frame of the constraint.
(I = i) List of labels (IX, IY, IZ) and values (ix, iy, iz) defining the rotation
stiffness of the constraint, in the geometrical reference frame of the
constraint (linear analysis only).
(A = c) List of labels (AX, AY, AZ) and values (cx, cy, cz) defining the
damping effect of the constraint in the geometrical reference frame of
the constraint.
(L = j0) List of labels (LX, LY, LZ) and values (jx0, jy0, jz0) defining the
initial gap in the geometrical reference frame of the constraint.
(ALPHA α ) Coefficient defining a damping proportional to stiffness (C = α K).
This damping is added to other damping.
(PROPOR=p) If p is greater than zero, the translation and rotation stiffness defined
previously are multiplied by the averaged local stiffness of the two
nodes of the element.
Note that this operation is achieved individually for each d.o.f and that non-
linear stiffness are accounted for.
This option is valid only for mechanical options.

(TF= tfusion) This label is active for non-linear thermo-mechanical analysis. To use
this possibility, the stiffness K is described in two different tables.
The first one gives K before reaching tfusion, the second gives K
once tfusion has been reached. See details afterwards.
For linear computation, k and c values are constants.
The gap generates nodal forces of type k.j0.
For non-linear computation, k values can depend on the relative displacement of the two nodes
in the corresponding constraint direction:

© 2019 ESI Group
Each label (KX, KY, KZ) is then associated with a negative value referencing a table defining
variation of functions f1, f2, f3.
In case the label TF is used, the syntax for K is the following:
MATERIAL
E… / (K=-i)
TABLE
i / -i1 –i2
i1 /…; table giving f if Temperature has never reached tfusion
i2 /…; table giving f if Temperature has reached once tfusion
For large displacement options, the local displacements just before reaching the temperature
tfusion are taken as initial displacements. Thus, the geometry can be frozen in this state for
example.
Likewise for non-linear computation, c values can depend on the relative velocity of the two
nodes in the corresponding constraint direction:
cx = g1 (vx2 - vx1)
cy = g2 (vy2 - vy1)
cz = g3 (vz2 - vz1)
Each label (AX, AY, AZ) is then associated with a negative value referencing a table defining
variation of functions g1, g2 and g3.
b. Constraint local reference frame
The preceding physical properties can be defined in the general reference frame, or a special
reference frame. In the latter case, the user can define the local reference frame of the constraint
with respect to the general reference frame in two ways:
l using the CONSTRAINT command with the DEFINITION procedure:
CONSTRAINT
nodes 1 2 / PSI Ψ THETHA θ PHI ϕ
where the nodes declared designate the nodes of the constraint element. The local reference
frame of the constraint relates to these nodes.

© 2019 ESI Group
l or extending the MATERIAL command already defined:
MATERIALS
elements / (K =k) (A =c) (L = j0) PSI Ψ THETHA θ PHI ϕ
the local reference frame of the constraint relates to the constraint element.
c. Special application for contact mechanisms
In the case of a non-linear problem, the special constraint element can be used to simulate
contact mechanisms (stop, unilateral constraint, etc.). A substantial stiffness value is then
imposed in the contact directions, preventing penetration. In practice this value can be set in
relation to the "mean" stiffness for the adjacent solid elements:
103 R ≤ k ≤ 106 R
where
k: stiffness of the constraint element,
R: stiffness of adjacent elements.
In the absence of any contact, the stiffness of the element is zero.
As the stiffness of the constraint element can vary rapidly with the relative displacement of the
element nodes, it is advisable to specify the following command on computation:
ALGORITHM OPTIMIZE 1
d. Other formulation based on force data

In this formulation, the input data is the internal (nonlinear) force and the stiffness is deduced
from this imposed (nonlinear) force. The stiffness is obtained between two nodes using the
variation of the internal force as a function of the relative position of those two nodes, in each
direction.
For example, along x axis:
Fint x = fx . (x2-X1) = fx . (ux2- ux1 – jx0)
The labels used in the MATERIAL line are:
MATERIAL (K=-f), (L=j0) FORMULATION 10
where:
f represents the table number for a displacement direction: x, y or z.
FORMULATION 10 is used to activate this option (0 by default activates the usual definition).
The tables used for f can be of types 1 to 6 included.

© 2019 ESI Group
The reference frame used for the definition can be global or local (as described in b.).
It is generally advised to use the command ALGORITHM OPTIMISE 1.
Example 1
To apply the inequality: x2 ≥ x1
we put: ux2 - ux1 + jx0 ≥ 0
with= x20 - x10 representing the initial gap in direction x
The table describing the stiffness of the constraint in direction x is represented by the following
figure:
Input data is as follows:
DEFINITION
...
MATERIALS
ELEMENT (list) /KX -nLX jx0
TABLE
n / 1 (-1000, k0) (0, k0) (ε,0) (1000,0)
...
TRANSIENT NON LINEAR
...

© 2019 ESI Group
Example 2
To simulate a unilateral constraint of the type:min ≤ ux 2 - ux 1 ≤ max
with damping proportional to stiffness.
We define a constraint stiffness in direction x, represented by the following figure:
DEFINITION
...
MATERIALS
ELEMENT (list) / KX -n
TABLE
n / 1 (-1000,α (min,α) (min +ε,0) (max - ε,0) (max, k0) (1000, k0)
...
...
Notes:
l The constraint element (code 1602) is available for mechanical problems with options 1, 2, 3, 4 , 6
and 7.
l The constraint element is also applicable for thermal problems (option 5), adapting the physical
significance of the labels (thermal conductivity, specific heat capacity, etc.).

© 2019 ESI Group
8.9 Shells Specially Designed for Non-Linear Analysis
8.9 SHELLS SPECIALLY DESIGNED FOR NON-LINEAR

ANALYSIS
These shells, particularly well suited to the analysis of buckling and non-linear phenomena, can
be used only with the algorithm TRANSIENT SHELL.
Two elements are available:
l an 8-nodes 3D isoparametric shell element (thick or thin). Since the number of integration
points varies through the thickness, material non-linearities are very well represented. This
element is particularly well suited to the analysis of stiffenedstructures or structures subjected
to high thermal gradients.
l a 2-nodes axisymmetric shell element, developed with a Fourier series, used in the non-linear
buckling analysis of structures with non-axisymmetric initial defects and/or subjected to non
axisymmetrical loadings.
8.9.1 SHE8 Spatial Shell Option

Static analysis:
l Thermo-elasto-visco-plastic behavior,
Static buckling analysis:

l Initial, plastic or incremental bifurcations,
l Incremental collapse, of shell structures in presence of large displacements, large rotations,
and moderate strains (10 %).
General Specifications
1. Reference Frame
The shells of arbitrary geometric form are defined in (Oxyz) space.
UX: displacement in the x-direction
UY: displacement in the y-direction
UZ: displacement in the z-direction
RX: rotation about the x-axis
RY: rotation about the y-axis
RZ: rotation about the z-axis

© 2019 ESI Group
3. Load Components
FX: force in the x-direction
FY: force in the y-direction
FZ: force in the z-direction
CX: moment about the x-axis
CY: moment about the y-axis
CZ: moment about the z-axis
4. Systems of Axes
The local coordinates (x, y, z) of the element are defined as follows:
l x-axis joins 8 (middle of 1-7) and 4 (middle of 3-5)
l z-axis is given by z = 84 ∧ 26.
l y-axis completes the local system.
The upper layer of the element corresponds to the positive z direction.

This system defines the sign of pressure loads (a positive pressure is oriented in the positive z
direction).

© 2019 ESI Group
Input Data
OPTION SHELL SHE8;
The label SHE8, differentiates the present type from the classical OPTION SHELL (See
Chapter 8 3.3.).
2. Elements
The standard 8-nodes element is described as follows:
Its code number is 2008.

2004 to 2007 code elements can exist and, in this case, must be described by replacing each
missing intermediate node by a node numbered 29999, the element type remains 2008.
This fictitious node must be defined and rigidly constrained.
3. Material Properties: Shell SHE8 option
All the properties below can be specified in tabular form, (table number preceded by the sign -)
as a function of temperature, except H, RHO, TREF and INTEGRATION.
a. System of Axes
Physical properties of elements are always defined with respect to global axes of the structure.
b.1. Isotropic Elastic Material
E= e Young's modulus
NU= nu Poisson's ratio (0 < ν < 0.5)
LX= lx thermal expansion coefficient
b.2. Anisotropic material
Not available for this type of element.

© 2019 ESI Group
b.3. Plasticity
In a purely elastic computation, this sequence is ignored. In the presence of plasticity, the
material laws must be of the same type for all the elements.
In the case of elastic and plastic materials, all the elastic materials must be described as plastic
materials, with an artificially high yield stress.
The type of material hardening law must be specified under the command TRANSIENT.
Material laws will be specified as follows
CURVE = i (i positive)
Table i must be of the PLASTIC type and specified under command TABLE.
i1 / PLASTICITY
TEMPERATUREt1( ε, σ)
.............................. ( ε, σ)
TEMPERATURE t2....
.
.
.
TEMPERATURE tn....
i2 / next table
l t1 ....tn are the temperatures for which the material hardening laws are defined
l ε total strains
l σ corresponding equivalent stresses
The first pair (ε, σ) corresponds compulsorily to the yield stress.
All the strain-hardening curves must be described with the same number of points.
A temperature-independent material is specified by one material law only.
For a temperature out of range the curve taken into account is that corresponding to the nearest
temperature.
For a given temperature, where ε is larger than the last value given, the hardening slope is kept.

© 2019 ESI Group
b.4. Creep
The creep laws adopted are of the Norton-Odquist type.
For the primary part:
with t ≤ tfp and tfp : end of primary creep

For the secondary part:
with
t > tfp
The creep constants to be defined are:

l C1, C2, n1, C3, n3 for the primary part,
l βand n for the secondary part.

The type of creep (RCC-MR or manual) is specified by the command:
CREEP = i
l i = 10the constants will be computed by the system. The creep constants used are the ones
defined in RCC MR for 316 SS steels.
It is therefore mandatory to use mm and MPa units, and hours for creep duration times.
l i = 20the creep constants will be entered manually using the following keywords :
Note:
l If the plasticity curves are defined for several temperatures, the creep properties must be defined
for several temperatures too, using tables the numbers of which are given after the labels PCA,
PCB,...
c. Section geometry
H=h>0 Uniform thickness.
H=h<0 The element has a variable thickness.
h is the number of a table in which are specified the thickness of the element at each corner
node 1, 3, 5 and 7 (no values to be given to the intermediate nodes).

© 2019 ESI Group
d. Density
RHO = ρ Specific mass
e. Reference temperature
TREF = to For a thermo-mechanical computation, the null stress state corresponds to the temperature to.
f. Formulation of the element
INTEGRATION = nz + 100 ny + 10000 nx
nz : number of Gaussian points in local z-direction (thickness)
ny : number of Gaussian points in local y-direction
nx : number of Gaussian points in local x-direction
nz : maximum of 7 points.
It is advisable to use 2 points (by default) in elastic cases and 5 points in plastic cases.
nx, ny : maximum of 3*3 points.
It is advisable to use 2*2 points (by default).
4. Constraints: Shell SHE8 option
UX, UY, UZ,
Constrained components of displacement and rotation
RX, RY, RZ
(See section d. below, before giving data for the rotational degrees of freedom).
b. Local coordinate systems
The presence of a local coordinate system on a constraint card (with or without constraint)
changes the coordinate system of this node. This local coordinates concerns:
l displacements (d.o.f. in translation),
l rotations (d.o.f. in rotation).
When it is a branch node, see section d) below.

When a node is located in a local coordinate system, do not put any relation on this node.
All nodal load cases are applied in the local coordinate system with the same restrictions as
above.
The local coordinate system is defined with respect to the global system by means of PSI,
THETA, PHI angles.
c. Elastic constraints
No elastic constraints are available for this element.

© 2019 ESI Group
d. Rotational degrees of freedom

d.1. Rotational degrees of freedom are defined by the commands described in section a), for the
two following cases:
l all the rotational d.o.f. of a node are rigidly constrained,
l the node is a branch node. A node is defined as a branch node when the angle between
normal axes to adjacent shells is greater than 30°.
Branch node
d.2. The following command must mandatory be used in the "Unique fiber" nodes case, i.e.
when nodes are not branch nodes (the angle between normal axes to adjacent shells is less than
30°).
For these nodes, rotations are calculated in a local coordinate system x, y, z:
l z is normal to the shell
l x and y are specified by the following command.
In this case, the following data under command CONSTRAINTS will be used:
SHE8 local axes

l z parallel to the mean normal axis,
l x defined in two equivalent manners:
o parallel to the vector (x1, y1, z1) expressed in the global axes,
o or normal to the plane defined by node n1 n2 n3.
l y such that (x, y, z) is a direct trihedron.

© 2019 ESI Group
The normal to the shell can be inclined with an angle less than 30 degrees with respect to the
symmetry or antisymmetry plane. If this condition is not satisfied, the command is ignored.
In the presence of the label SYMMETRY, rotation RX remains free, RY is rigidly constrained
and RZ eliminated. This corresponds to a symmetry condition on the rotational degrees of
freedom with respect to a plane with the normal oriented in the x-direction above.
Symmetry condition
In the presence of the label ANTISYMMETRY, rotation RY remains free, RX is rigidly
constrained and RZ is eliminated. This corresponds to an antisymmetry condition on the
rotational degrees of freedom with respect to a plane with the normal oriented in the x-direction
above.
Antisymmetry condition
In the presence of the label ONOFF, it is possible to specify a variable rotational d.o.f. in SHE8
local coordinate system.
SHE8 ONOFF command must mandatory be preceded by a condition of type a) which will be
applied only for rotations in SHE8 local coordinate system.

© 2019 ESI Group
Note:
l SHE8 ONOFF command only defines local axes; fixing d.o.f. in rotation is performed by the
command of type a). Label ONOFF is also used (See 8 9.1.3.5. APPLIED LOADS) to specify a
variable rotational d.o.f. during transient loading (labels ORX or ORY).
In some cases it is obviously difficult to accurately assess the angle between the two normals.
Users are consequently advised to run the system in VERIF mode at first. The system will
systematically fix the rotational d.o.f. about the normal to the unique fibber nodes. The
rotational degrees of freedom may then be defined by the commands above.
Constraints of type SHE8 must be defined after all others constraints for a given node.
Recall:
l SHE8 constraint conditions of type d.2) are substitutive each other (but they are additive with
respect to conditions of type a)).
5. Applied Loads: Shell SHE8 option
The 8-nodes shell element and the 2-nodes quasi-axisymmetric shell element can only be used
under the command TRANSIENT SHELL (See 12.6). All loads must consequently be
associated with a time function defined in TABLE (cf. 4.15). For reasons of efficiency, the
table definition must satisfy the following requirements:
Rule 1:
All loads are classified in one of the following categories:
l temperature or displacement type:
o 5.1. imposed displacement (nodes),
o 5.2. temperature (nodes or elements),
o 5.3. temperature gradient (nodes or elements).
l force type:
o 5.4. concentrated force (nodes),
o 5.5. pressure (elements : uniform, linear or hydrostatic),
o 5.6. acceleration (elements),
o 5.7. ONOFF conditions (nodes).
A time function associated with a force type load (5.4 to 5.7) cannot, at the same time, be
associated with a displacement or temperature type load (5.1. to 5.3.) : in this case, tables with
different numbers have to be defined.
Rule 2:
A time function (label FT) must always be associated with an imposed displacement.
The numbers of the time functions associated with loads must be below a value arbitrarily fixed
at 1000. This arbitrary limit can be modified (parameter TABLE of the command
DIMENSION under TRANSIENT SHELL (See 12.6). A low limit allows a reduction of the
memory size.

© 2019 ESI Group
Imposed displacements
UX = uxo UY = uyo UZ = uzo RX = rxo RY = ryo RZ = rzo FT = ft
uxo ... rzo = value of the imposed displacement (or rotation)
ft = associated time function number.
The value of the imposed displacement at time t is given as follows:
uxo * ft(t)
Reminder:
l The degrees of freedom must be previously set under the command CONSTRAINTS (See
8.9.1.3.4.a).
If a local coordinate system has been defined under the same command CONSTRAINTS, the
displacement will be imposed in this local system (See 8.9.1.3.4.b). By default, the coordinate
system will be the global coordinate system.
Temperature
On the nodes
TEMP = t0 FMT = ft0
t0 imposed temperature on the specified nodes
ft0 time function associated with t0
On the elements
a. Uniform
Same data as for an imposed temperature on the nodes.
b. Variable through the thickness
A load function of this type is incompatible with load functions specified in 5.2.1. or 5.2.2.a or
5.3.
A temperature can be defined at each of the integration points through the thickness, up to a
limit of 5 Gaussian points (the number of integration points must be the same as specified for
the computation).
TEMP = t F1 = f1 F2 = f2 F3 = f3 F4 = f4 F5 = f5
t temperature
fi time function associated with the "i"th thickness integration point.

© 2019 ESI Group
Location of the integration points through the thickness

2 points 5 points
z1 = -0.906 h/2
z2 = -0.538 h/2
z1 = -0.577 h/2
z3 = 0.
z2 =0.577 h/2
z4 = 0.538 h/2
z5 = 0.906 h/2
Temperature gradient (on nodes or elements)
GRAD g0 FGRAD fg0
g0 Temperature gradient through the thickness, along the normal at the node. In the case of a
gradient on an element, the same function is applied to each of the nodes of the element.
g0 =
with e : thickness of the shell
Delta T : T(Z=+1) – T(Z=-1) (with respect to the chosen direction of the normal to the
element)
fg0 Associated time function.
Concentrated Force
FX = fx0 FY = fy0 FZ = fz0 CX = cx0 CY = cy0 CZ = cz0 FT = ft
fx0,fy0, fz0, cx0, cy0, cz0 imposed force (or moment)
ft associated time function

© 2019 ESI Group
If a local coordinate system has been specified under the command CONSTRAINTS (See
Chapter 8. 9.1.3.4.b), then the concentrated force will be applied in this local system. By
default, the coordinate system adopted will be the global coordinate system.
Pressures or distributed loads (on elements)
Uniform
PZ = p FT = f (NON CONSERVATIVE)
p algebraic value of the pressure along the local z direction (See Chapter 8. 9.1.2.4) The
sign of p (direction of z) is related to the order in which the element nodes were defined.
f associated time function.
NON the direction of the pressure follows the shape of the deformed structure.
CONSERVATIVE
By default, the direction of the pressure is fixed (conservative).
Linear
An element cannot be subjected to both a uniform pressure and a linear pressure .
PRZ = p F1 = f1 F2 = f2 F3 = f3 F4 = f4
p see 5.5.1
fi time function associated with node i (in the order of description of the element).
NON see 5.5.1
CONSERVATIVE
Example:
PRZ = 1 F1 = f1 F2 = f2 F3 = f3 F4 = f4
Hydrostatic pressure
Not available for this element.

© 2019 ESI Group
Acceleration (on the elements)

GX = gx GY = gy GZ = gz FGX = fgx FGY = fgy FGZ = fgz
gx, gy, gz acceleration components in the x, y, z directions of the global coordinate system.
fgx, fgy, fgz time functions associated with gx, gy, gz respectively.
ON-OFF conditions
Variable boundary conditions during loading.
OX = fx OY = fy OZ = fz ORX = frx ORY = fry ORZ = frz
fx, fy, fz, frx, fry, frz time functions associated with the degrees of freedom
fi(t)=0 : free d.o.f.
fi(t)=1 : fixed d.o.f.
Relations
Only the relations described in 4.10.1. are available, and the right side of the equation must be
zero.
Computed Results: Shell SHE8 option

Two cases are to be considered, according to the type of print-out requested in the command
PRINT under TRANSIENT SHELL.
1. Displacements
UX, UY, UZ Nodal displacements
These components are expressed in terms of the global coordinate system, unless a local
coordinate system has been defined in the command CONSTRAINTS (See 8.9.1.3.4). In this
case, the nodal displacements are expressed in both the local and global coordinate systems.
RX, RY, RZ Nodal rotations
These components are expressed (See 8. 9.1.3.4.c.2)
l in the local coordinate system, in the case of a unique fiber node.
In this case, RZ component is null.
l in the global coordinate system in the case of a branch node.
a. Complete print-out
At each iteration (for nonlinear problems), incremental and total displacements.
b. Standard print-out
Total displacements at the end of each load increment.
2. Structural Load Vector
FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZComponents of structural load vector
In the complete print-out case only, at each iteration. From the second iteration on, this vector
corresponds to the unbalanced equilibrium forces.

© 2019 ESI Group
3. Reactions (at clamped edges)

RX, RY, RZ, NX, NY, Components of reaction vector
NZ
In the complete print-out case only. This vector has a physical meaning only for linear elastic
analyses.
Notes:
l If the load case introduces a component of the generalized forces vector on an imposed d.o.f, the
reaction computed for this d.o.f doesn't take account of the loading associated with this d.o.f.
l In the case of non zero imposed displacements, the reactions are correctly computed for the non
zero imposed d.o.f., but are wrong for the other d.o.f. of the element, to which belongs the non zero
imposed d.o.f.
4. Stresses
At each Gaussian point through the thickness of the element and at each iteration (non-linear
problems):
SXX, SYY, SZZ, Stress components expressed in the local system of the
SXY, SYZ, SZX, SEQ integration point (this coordinate system is so defined
that SZZ=0) and von MISES equivalent stress.
Table Cell Outside Table: Total strain components (minus thermal strains), and
EXX, EYY, EZZ, EXY, EYZ, equivalent plastic strain.
EZX, EEQ
For each element and each load increment:
At each integration point through the thickness, mean values on the layer:
SXX, SYY, SXY, ESQ, EEQ, stress components in the layer, Von Mises equivalent
stress,
Table Cell Outside Table: TEM equivalent plastic strain, temperature.
Mean values on the element:
SXX, SYY, SXY, SXX, membrane and bending stress, components, energy,
SYY, SXY,EN, TEM temperature.
EXX, EYY, EXY, EXX, membrane and bending strain components,
EYY, EXY, DEN, TEM incremental energy, temperature.
Note:
l In the case of kinematic hardening, SYSTUS prints out the value of the equivalent stress: OA or BC of the
figure below, according to yielding or absence of yielding.

© 2019 ESI Group

© 2019 ESI Group
8.9.2 SHED Axisymmetric Harmonic Shell Option

Static Analysis:
l Thermo-elasto-visco-plastic behavior,
Static buckling analysis:
l initial, plastic or incremental bifurcations
l incremental collapse of quasi-axisymmetric structures, in the presence of large displacements
and moderate rotations.

Loads are expanded in Fourier series and non-axisymmetric initial defects can be taken into
account (See Chapter 12.6 TRANSIENT SHELL).
The use of this element is highly recommended for the analysis of axisymmetric structures with
initial defects.
In comparison with an equivalent 3-D structure meshed by SHE8 elements, this approach
reduces the computer time and can be easier to use.
1. Reference Frame
The element is defined by its meridian section in the (xOy) plane. Oy is the rotation axis, Ox the
radial direction and Oz the circumferential (or tangential) direction.
UX: displacement in the x-direction (radial displacement)
UY: displacement in the y-direction (axial displacement)
UZ: displacement in the z-direction (tangential displacement)
RZ: rotation about the z-axis (about positive-z)
3. Load Components
FX: force in the x-direction
FY: force in the y-direction
FZ: force in the z-direction
CZ: moment about z-axis
4. Systems of Axes
The local coordinates (x,y,z) of the 2-node element are defined as follows :
l x-axis joins nodes 1 and 2, oriented from 1 to 2
l y-axis is obtained by a rotation of 90° in the counter-clockwise direction
l z-axis completes the right-handed set of axes.
This system defines the direction and the sign of the pressure loads (a positive pressure is
oriented in the positive y-direction).

© 2019 ESI Group
Input Data
OPTION SHELL AXISYMMETRIC HARMONIC SHED i
The label SHED, differentiates the present type from the classical option (See Chapter 8.5.1.).
i indicates the table defining all the Fourier harmonics used in the computation. This table must
be specified under command TABLE (See 4.15.2) and the harmonics must be defined as
follows:
l symmetric n : +n
l symmetric 0 : 0
Caution:
l The symmetric harmonic 0 must always be included in the table defined under the command
OPTION. All the harmonics defined must be multiples of the smallest non-zero harmonic.
l In this option, the tables must be supplied before the constraints and loads.
2. Elements
Only a 2-node element is available. Its code number is 1002 (by default).
3. Material properties: SHED axisymmetric harmonic shell option
All the properties below can be specified in tabular form, (table number preceded by the sign -)
as a function of temperature, except H, RHO, TREF and INTEGRATION.
a. System of axes
Physical properties are always defined with respect to the local coordinate system of the
element.
b. Material
As in 8.9.1.3.3.b

© 2019 ESI Group
c. Section geometry
H=h
h uniform thickness
d. Density
RHO = ρ density
TREF = to
For a thermo-mechanical computation, the zero stress state corresponds to temperature to. This
data corresponds to the axisymmetric mode of the structure.
The element has one Gaussian integration point in its meridian direction.
INTEGRATION= ny + 100*nz
ny number of Gaussian points through the thickness.
nz number of Simpson points in the tangential direction.
ny maximum of 5 points.
It is advisable to use 2 points (by default) in elastic cases and 5 points in plastic cases.
nz value by default is (2 * largest multiplier + 1) i.e. for a computation performed with the
harmonics 0, 12, 24, 36, 48. nz default value is 9 = (2*48/12 + 1).
4. Constraints: SHED axisymmetric harmonic shell option
It is necessary to specify on which Fourier harmonics (amongst those described on the card
OPTION) a constraint condition is applied. This can be done in two ways:
l for each harmonic i
SYMMETRIC i
i (positive or zero) harmonic number on which the constraint occurs.
l by means of a table as in (4.15.2)
HARMONIC i
i > 0 table number containing the list of harmonics for which the constraint condition occurs.
(This table is described as in 8.9.2.3.1.).
Note:
l For this element (unlike other SYSTUS elements), constraint conditions are additive (logical
addition).
b. Local coordinate systems
Not available for this element.
c. Elastic constraints

© 2019 ESI Group
No elastic constraints are available for this element.

5. Applied Loads: SHED axisymmetric harmonic shell option
The general rules to specify load function tables are those formulated in 8 9.1.3.5., with an
additional rule:
l under DEFINITION one must define as many load functions as harmonic loads.
The transient computation will take only one load into account, this being the sum of the
different loads specified under DEFINITION.
The harmonic number is specified on the card including the load number and its title (See 4.7.2)
j Title / SYMMETRIC n
The only load types defined on a harmonic other than the symmetric harmonic 0 are:
l imposed displacements,
l concentrated force,
l uniform or linear pressure,
l temperature (not available).
Imposed displacement
Refer to Chapter 8.9.1. Part Input data - Applied loads.
For UX, UY, UZ, RZ d.o.f. only.
No local coordinate system.
Temperatures
On the nodes
Refer to Chapter 8.9.1. - Part Input data - Applied loads.
On the elements
a. Uniform
Refer to Chapter 8.9.1.- Part Input data - Applied loads.
b. Variable
b.1. Linear between the 2 nodes and uniform through the thickness
TEMPERATURE t F1 = f1 F2 = f2
t temperature value
fi time function associated with node i

© 2019 ESI Group
b.2. Uniform between the 2 nodes but variable through the thickness
Do not use this load type with other temperature or gradient functions.
As in Chapter 8.9.1. - Part Input data, but at least 3 temperatures must be specified (at least 3
Gaussian points), otherwise the load described is of the b.1 type.
Temperature gradient (on nodes or elements)
Refer to Chapter 8.9.1. - Part Input data - Applied loads.
Concentrated force
As in Chapter 8.9.1. - Part Input Data for forces components FX, FY, FZ, CZ.
The forces are given by radian.
No local coordinate system.
Pressure or distributed loads (on the elements)
Uniform or linear pressures are defined in the element local coordinate system (Refer to Chapter
8.9.2. – Part General Specifications).
The pressure follows the shape of the deformed structure (non conservative) only in the case of
harmonic 0. For any other harmonic, its direction is fixed (conservative).
Uniform
a. Normal
PY = py FT = f
py algebraic pressure along local y-direction (See 8.9.1)
b. Tangential
PX = px FT = f
px algebraic pressure along local x-direction (See 8.9.1)
Linear between the 2 nodes
a. Normal
PRY = py F1 = f1 F2 = f2
py algebraic pressure along local y-direction (See 8.9.1)
fi time function associated with node i
b. Tangential
PRX = px F1 = f1 F2 = f2
px algebraic pressure along local x-direction (See 8.9.1)
fi time function associated with node i.

© 2019 ESI Group
Hydrostatic
The hydrostatic pressure is always normal to the element.
HYDRO =ρg SURFACE = y0 FT = ft
ρ fluid density
g gravity acceleration
y0 free surface level
ft associated time function.
The pressure at a level y is given by :
p = ρg * (y0-y) * ft(t)
Notes
l For the same element, one can combine at most :
l a hydrostatic pressure, a linear pressure.
and
l a linear pressure or a uniform pressure.
l Don't load an element located above the free surface level, because it would generate a non-
physical pressure.
Acceleration (on the elements)
GX = gx GY = gy FGX = fgx FGY = fgy
gx, gy components of the acceleration along the global x and y directions.
fgx, fgy time functions associated with gx and gy components.
ON-OFF conditions
As in 8. 9.1.3.5.8. For UX, UY, UZ, RZ d.o.f. only.
6. Mechanisms
The table defining linear relations between degrees of freedom (See 4.9.1.a) is modified in the
case of the SHED option.
In addition to the node number, the user has to supply the harmonic number.
Integer k is defined in the SHED option as follows:
k = 100 * nharm + 10 * n0 + j
nharm is the order of the harmonic in the list specified under the command OPTION.
Computed Results
Two cases are considered, according to the type of print-out requested in the command PRINT
under TRANSIENT SHELL.

© 2019 ESI Group
1. Displacements
For each node and each harmonic
UX, UY, UZ, Nodal displacements in terms of global coordinate system
RX, RY, RZ, (RX=RY=0).
At each iteration (for nonlinear problems) incremental and total displacements.
Total displacements at the end of each load increment.
2. Structural load vector
FX, FY, FZ, Components of structural load vector (MX=MY=0)
MX, MY, MZ
In the complete print-out only, and in this case at each iteration.
From the second iteration on, this vector corresponds to the unbalanced equilibrium forces.
3. Reactions (at clamped edges)
RX, RY, RZ, Components of reaction vector (NX=NY=0)
NX, NY, NZ
In complete print-out case only. This vector has a physical meaning only for linear elastic
analyses.
4. Stresses
For each element, five groups of results are given:
l For each integration point along the tangential direction and for each point of integration
through the thickness (in complete printout case only).

SS, TT, ST, SQ, EQ, RATIO, TEMP axial, tangential and shear stresses in the
local coordinate system, von Mises
equivalent stress, equivalent plastic strain,
plasticity index, mean temperature.
FS, FT, FST, MS, MT, MST, TMOY forces and moments, mean temperature
l Total and incremental energy
l For each integration point along the tangential direction:
SI, SS, SM, EPI, EPS, EPM von Mises equivalent stress and equivalent plastic strain at the
integration points through the thickness, closest to the lower,
upper and median layers.
l for each harmonic
FS, FT, FST, MS, MT, MST Expanded forces and moments.

© 2019 ESI Group
8.9.3 SHET Thermal Shell Option

Thermal analysis (linear or not) of shell structures.
The temperature in the shell has variations:
l in the surface of the element (quadratic expansion as displacement in SHE8 element)
l through the thickness of the shell (discretization as Legendre polynomials)
NP: number of nodes of the element

NL: maximum degree of Legendre polynomials at node j
r,s: isoparametric coordinates in the plane of the element
t: generalized coordinate of thickness
Pi(t): Legendre polynomial (of degree i)
Nj(r,s): shape function at node j
Tij: generalized temperature degree of freedom :
l at node j
l for Legendre polynomial (coefficient of degree i)
Reminder about Legendre polynomials:
P1(t) = 1 => T1j mean temperature through thickness
P2(t) = t => T2j is proportional to dT/dz
1. Reference Frame
Thermal shell elements are defined in the same way as mechanical SHE8 elements (see Chapter
8.9.1).
From 1 to 6 degrees of freedom per node (Legendre polynomial coefficients through the
thickness. The first degree of freedom is mean temperature).
3. Load Components
From 1 to 6 heat source components defined as Legendre polynomial through the thickness.
4. System of Axes
Local axes are the same as for the SHE8 element.

© 2019 ESI Group
Input Data
1. Option
OPTION THERMAL SHET degmax
degmax : coefficient number of Legendre polynomials for temperature.

Default value = 1, maximum value = 6.
2. Elements
Same definition as for SHE8.
3. Material properties: SHET thermal shell option
a. System of axes
Not used
b. Material
C=c Specific heat per unit of mass.
KX = kx Conductivity (may be temperature-dependent if
VARIABLE label is added).
Material is considered to be isotropic.
If c and kx have negative values, these properties are temperature-dependent via tables -kx,
and -c.
c. Section geometry
H=h as for SHE8 element
d. Density
RHO = ro Density.
If ro is negative, it is temperature-dependent via table -ro.
TREF = To Initial temperature for the element (necessary for first computation step if the material
properties are temperature-dependent).
INTEGRATION = nz + 100*ny + 10000*nx
nz: number of integration points in thickness (by default, the maximum degree
of Legendre polynomials at the nodes of the element).
ny: number of GAUSSIAN points in surface in y direction (2 by default).
nx: number of GAUSSIAN points in surface in x direction (2 by default).

© 2019 ESI Group
4. Constraints: SHET thermal shell option

a. Degree of Legendre polynomials at each node
n / DEGREE q
q : must be lower than degmax defined for the OPTION command (by default degmax is the
degree for every node).
For branch node (see SHE8 element), the degree is reduced to 1.
b. Rigid constraint: prescribed temperature at nodes
n / TT
mean temperature (first Legendre coefficient) is fixed.
orn / T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
assumes that corresponding Legendre coefficients are fixed.
c. Elastic constraints at nodes
Not used
d. Elastic constraints distributed over the elements: FOURIER Condition
m / KT ktFT ftVARI g(UPPER or LOWER)
These constraints define the heat exchange with an outside medium, corresponding to:
Q = -kt . f(t) . g(T) . (T-T0)
kt: constant coefficient for exchange function
g(T): temperature-dependent function
f(t): time-dependant function
UPPER: kt is applied on the upper face (local z positive) or on the lower face of the shell.
or
LOWER
T0: outside temperature (see 5.3 Loads).
5. Applied Loads: SHET thermal shell option
Temperature on nodes
a. Mean prescribed temperature at node
n / TT t0 FT f
f: time-dependent function.

© 2019 ESI Group
b. Fixed Legendre coefficients on nodes

n / T1 t1....T6 t6 FT f
ti: prescribed value for "i" th Legendre coefficient
f: time-dependent function (will be the same for every coefficient).
Degrees of freedom where temperature is prescribed must have been constrained first.
Sources of heat
a. Sources of heat distributed over elements: Neumann condition
m / QR qr FT f (UPPER or LOWER)
qr: uniformly distributed source of heat per unit of surface (a positive value indicates input flow).
UPPER or: exchange occurs on upper or lower face.
LOWER
b. Sources of heat per unit of volume
m / QV qv FT f
qv: source of heat per unit of volume.
Prescribed temperature on elements : Fourier condition
m / TT t0
t0: is the outside temperature for Fourier condition exchange (see 4.d)
Computed Results
a. Standard print-out
For each node, the 6 Legendre coefficients and also temperatures are printed for the lower,
middle and upper surfaces.
b. Complete print-out
Moreover, temperatures at each integration points in the thickness are printed.

© 2019 ESI Group
8.10 Mixing Option (MULTI Command)
8.10 MIXING OPTION (MULTI COMMAND)

8.10.1 Introduction
In SYSTUS, the choice of type of structure determines the number and type of degrees of
freedom per node for a given type of analysis.
This rule can be circumvented by SUBSTRUCTURING (see Chapter 10.), which for linear
static analysis, allows problems involving more than one type of structure to be analysed.
It is possible to include solid structure elements in the following options:
l PLANE BEAM and AXISYMMETRIC SHELL , with 3 degrees of freedom per node for
two dimensional structures under the following conditions:
o Solid 3D elements are computed with the maximum number of degrees of freedom of the
option SHELL option (3). Stiffnesses of solid element nodal rotations are automatically
stabilized by the program.
o Shell or beam elements must be connected to the solid structure by several nodes, in order
to transmit rotations. Rotations and moment can be transmitted also by rigid elements.
o MULTI can be used for linear analysis, under SOLVE, SUBSTRUCTURING,
DYNAMIC and TRANSIENT LINEAR, but the routine is not applicable to the non
linear transient analysis.
l SHELL and BEAM with 6 degrees of freedom with the following particularities:
o Solid 3D elements are computed with a vairable number of degrees of freedom: 3 for
nodes connected to 3D elements and 6 for nodes connected to shell or beam elements.
o Shell or beam elements must be connected to the solid structure by transition elements, in
order to transmit rotations. These transition elements are automatically created by the
routine COMPATIBILITY described in section below.
o The management of degrees of freedom is performed with the solvers described in chapter
21. For DYNAMIC these solvers have been introduced for SUBSPACE ITERATIVE
and INVERSE POWER DIAGONAL. For other cases (SOLVE SPARSE,
SUBSTRUCTURE and DYNAMIC) the computation is performed without suppression
of degrees of freedom.

© 2019 ESI Group
8.10.2 Two Dimensional Structures

There are two types of command depending upon the type of structure being defined
(translation or axisymmetric). In both cases the label MULTI must be specified after the
OPTION command.
Axisymmetric structures
OPTION SHELL AXISYMMETRIC MULTI
Additional elements available with MULTI option (see Chapter 8.4.2):

l 1502, 1503: "surface" elements
l 2003 to 2008: axisymmetric two dimensional elements
Plane structures or translation

l plane strain behavior
OPTION PLANE BEAM MULTI
l plane stress behavior
OPTION PLANE BEAM TRANSLATION MULTI
Additional elements available with MULTI option (see 8.4.2):

l 1502, 1503: "surface" elements
l 2003 to 2008: two dimensional elements
Note:
l The element type 5 is used to differentiate surface elements from other one-dimensional elements.
Material properties
These are the same as for the basic type of structure (see 8.4.2 and 8.2.2). The parameter KZ =
kz is used to adjust the stiffness stability of RZ degree of freedom by rotation of solid elements.
The Stiffness added to the rotation will be kz timesthe average pivot by displacement of the
element. By default kz = 1.e-5.
Degrees of freedom UX, UY, RZ

© 2019 ESI Group
Computed results
l Displacements : UX UY RZ
Rotation of nodes, to which only solid elements are associated, is irrelevant.

l Reactions : FX FY CZ
The CZ component at rigidly constrained nodes of the solid element is irrelevant.

l Forces depend on type of element
o plane beam element: NX, TY, MZ (at each end of element)
o axisymmetric shell element: NX, NZ, MX, MZ
o solid element: SIGX, SIGY, TAUXY, SIGZ

© 2019 ESI Group
8.10.3 Three Dimensional Structures

The syntax of the command must be in one of the following forms:
OPTION SHELL MULTI
OPTION BEAM MULTI
The following elements can be used in the same model:

l parallelepiped, prism or tetrahedron solid elements (form 3004, 3006, 3008, 3010, 3015,
3020 or form 3504, 3506, 3508, 3510, 3515, 3520),
l membrane elements (form 2503, 2504, 2506, 2508),
l bar elements (form 1502, 1503),
l shell elements (form 2003, 2403, 2404, 2406, 2408),
l beam elements (form 1002),
l cable elements (form 1202),
l special elements (form x9xx).
The element type 5 is used to differentiate surface elements of a solid from shell or beam
elements.
At the boundary between shell and solid elements (or between beam and solid elements)
transition elements are used to transmit rotations to solid elements.
These elements are created by the routine COMPATIBILITY as described below.
Material properties
For initial elements (3D, shell or beam elements) material properties are the same as basic
options (TRIDIMENSIONAL, 3D SHELL and BEAM).
The parameter KZ = kz is also used to adjust the stiffness stability of degrees of freedom by
rotation of solid elements.
The Stiffness added to the rotations will be kz times the average pivot by displacement of the
element. By default kz = 1.e-5.
For transition elements:
l a conditioning or penalty coefficient, homogeneous in unity to Young’s modulus,
l a formulation indicating the nature of the transition (shell/solid or beam/solid).

© 2019 ESI Group
The following input data is for transition elements:
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
...
ELEMENTS <list> / E SHAPE n
or
...
E or value of the coefficient associated with the formulation of transition elements (Label
PENALTY or LAGRANGE of the routine COMPATIBILITY):
l penalty coefficient homogeneous to the Young modulus, its order of magnitude is:
l conditioning coefficient homogeneous to the Young modulus , its order of magnitude is:
represents the material elasticity modulus nearby the shell/solid or beam/solid boundary
By default, values and are defined with = 200 000.
SHAPE n n specifies the type of transition ( shell/solid or beam/solid) and the type of formulation
associated with this transition (penalty or Lagrange):
l n = 1 shell/solid transition and penalty formulation,
l n = 11 shell/solid transition and Lagrange formulation by multipliers,
l n = 2 beam/solid transition and penalty formulation,
l n = 12 beam/solid transition and Lagrange formulation by multipliers.
Degrees of freedom: variable from 3 to 6 (UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, RZ).
Constraints
Constraints are the same as basic options (TRIDIMENSIONAL (see 8.4.3.4), 3D SHELL (see
8.3.3.4) and BEAM (see 8.2)).
Applied Loads
Applied loads are the same as basic options (TRIDIMENSIONAL (see 8.4.3.5), 3D SHELL
(see 8.3.3.5) and BEAM (see 8.2)).
The "torque" load (see 8.4.2.5.e and 8.4.3.5.e) is also available in "SHELL MULTI” option.
Computed results
l Displacements : UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, RZ
Rotation of nodes, to which only solid elements are associated, is irrelevant.

l Reactions : FX, FY, FZ, CX, CY, CZ
CX CY and CZ components at rigidly constrained nodes of the solid element are irrelevant.
l Forces depend on type of element
o beam element:NX, TY, TZ, MX, MY, MZ (at each end of element)

© 2019 ESI Group
o shell element:NX, NXY, NY, MX, MXY, MY

o solid element:σx, σy, σz, τxy, τyz, τxz
The structure and content of the FORCE file are detailed in Chapter 17.
Notes:
l For a thermo-mechanical computation :
OPTION SHELL THERMODEPENDENT MULTI

or
OPTION BEAM THERMODEPENDENT MULTI
l the computation option which must be used for the thermal computation preceeding the mechanical
computation is the following:
OPTION THERMAL ENTHALPY MULTI

© 2019 ESI Group
8.10.4 Routine of Transition Element Creation

The command COMPATIBILITY allows to create transition elements at the shell- solid
boundary and the beam-solid boundary.
Input Data
COMPATIBILITY PENALTY
LAGRANGE
MIXING SOLID SHELL
BEAM
(SOLID ELEMENT <list>)
(SHELL ELEMENT <list>)
(BEAM ELEMENT <list>)
RETURN
COMPATIBILITY command
This command triggers off the routine.
PENALTY or LAGRANGE
is used to specify the formulation of transition elements as well as the value of the coefficient
associated with the selected formulation:
l penalty coefficient is homogeneous with the Young modulus, its order of magnitude is:
l conditioning coefficient is homogeneous with the Young modulus, its order of magnitude is:
represents the material elasticity modulus nearby the shell-solid or beam-solid boundary.
By default, values and are defined with = 200 000.
MIXING command
This command points out that transition elements have to be created at the solid-shell boundary
with the label SHELL or (and) at the solid-beam boundary with the label BEAM.
SOLID, SHELL, BEAM commands
These commands are optional. They allow to define transition elements in a limited area of the
structure:
l from a set of 3D solid elements and a set of shell elements,
l from a set of 3D solid elements and a set of beam elements.
By default all solid, shell and beam elements are taken into account.

© 2019 ESI Group
8.10.5 Limitation on the Use of Post Processing

MULTI allows post processing (see Chapter 13) to be used for displacements, reactions,
velocities and accelerations. But it is more difficult to consider stresses, nodal stresses and nodal
strains, because their nature is different according to whether the element is a shell, a beam or a
solid. Whenever possible, it is better to group the elements according to their dimensions.
Combination of results (COMBINE command)
For the FORCE file, there is no particular problem. But MULTI does not allow a STRESS file
to be used at Gaussian integration points, because this file only exists for continuous media
elements connected to 2003, 2004, 2203 and 2204 elements.
Average
Not applicable to the STRESS file (see COMBINE).
This routine can be used only for the forces file of solid elements, as follows.
AVERAGE FORCE
ELEMENT DIME 2 for 2D structure ...
RETURN
AVERAGE FORCE
ELEMENT DIME 3 for 3D structure ...
RETURN
POSTPROCESSING module
The same remark as for AVERAGE is applicable. To obtain a post processing set of results, it
is necessary to select a set of elements with the same type (use SELECT ELEMENT
command).

© 2019 ESI Group
8.10.6 Example 1: Mixing Options for 2D/Beam Elements

The model chosen consists of 3 solid two dimensional elements 2008, 6 surface elements 1503,
and 5 plane and beam elements 1002, two of which are used to connect the two structures.
Description of the connection
The bending stiffnesses of elements 7 and 8 is increased by a factor of 10.E+5 in order to

transmit the rotation of node 5008 to displacements of nodes 2 and 3. The material property AX
is set to zero to prevent adding axial stiffness.
Fictitious constraints RZ have been applied (node 1, 4, 5003) in order to stabilize the numerical
solution.
Note:
l The connection of a 3D solid structure with a shell element can be formed with 3D beams or rigid
shells (in the latter case, only by increasing the YOUNG'S MODULUS).
DEFINITION
MIXING OPTION
OPTION PLANE BEAM MULTI THERMOELASTICITY
TWO-DIMENSION
NODES
1 /

© 2019 ESI Group
2 / .4 0
3 / .4 .2
4 / 0 .2
ELEMENTS
1 / 1 2 3 4
4 / 4 3 TYPE 1002
9 / 2 1 TYPE 1002
EDGES
10 / 1 2 3
20 / 4 3 3
ADD
MODIFY
CORRECT
ELEMENTS
4 TO 6, 9 TO 11/ TYPE= 1503
ADD
NODES
30 / .6 .1
31 / .8 .1
32 / 1 .1
ELEMENTS
100 / 5008 30
200 / 30 31
300 / 31 32
7/ 3 5008
8/ 5008 2
VERIFY
MATERIALS
E 1 TO 3 / E .21*12 NU .3 LX LY 1.*-5 RHO 7800 H .1 ; 2D elements
E 4 TO 6 / E .21*12 NU .3 LX LY 1.*-5 RHO 7800 SURFACE ;surface elem.
E 7 TO 8 / E .21*12 NU .3 S .02 IZ 6.667 LX 1.*-5 ; rigid elem.
E 100 200 300 / E .21*12 NU .3 S .02 RHO 7800 IZ 6.667*-5 LX 1.*-5; plane beam ;
elem.
CONSTRAINTS
5003 / UX UY RZ
1 4 / UX RZ
LOADS
1 FORCE AT THE END OF CONTINUOUS PLANE FRAME, FY = 156
N 32 / FY 156
RETURN
SOLVE

© 2019 ESI Group
8.10.7 Example 2: 3D/Space Shell Mixed Problem

Here is the input data of the following problem: a square plate resting simply on its four sides is
subjected to a homogeneous temperature field and a pressure uniformly distributed.
An elastoplastic analysis with large displacements is made under “MULTI
THERMOMECHANICAL SPACE SHELL”option.
Only a quater of the plate is represented. The central area of the plate is modelled by two layers
of solid elements 3008. What is left is modelled by shell elements 2404.
The temperature field is imposed on nodes, then transmitted to solid element nodes and shell
elements by means of the “TEMPERATURE” command.
The pressure is applied to shell elements and membrane elements which coincide with the
medium plane of the plate.
Transition elements with penalty formulation are used to transmit rotations to solid elements.
The penalty coefficient value is fixed at 1000 times the material elasticity modulus.
Geometry plate creation
DEFINITION
PLATE
OPTION SHELL MULTI
THREE-DIMENSIONAL
NODE
1/ 0 0 0
2/ 340 0 0
3/ 400 0 0
4/ 400 340 0
5/ 400 400 0
6/ 340 400 0
7/ 0 400 0
8/ 0 340 0
9/ 340 340 0
19/ 340 340 -2.5
14/ 400 340 -2.5
15/ 400 400 -2.5
16/ 340 400 -2.5
29/ 340 340 2.5
24/ 400 340 2.5
25/ 400 400 2.5
26/ 340 400 2.5

© 2019 ESI Group
ELEMENT
101/ 19 14 15 16 9 4 5 6 TYPE 3008
201/ 9 4 5 6 29 24 25 26 TYPE 3008
301/ 9 4 5 6 TYPE 2504
401/ 1 2 9 8 TYPE 2404
501/ 2 3 4 9 TYPE 2404
601/ 8 9 6 7 TYPE 2404
EDGE
101/ 2 1 4 PROG 1.2
301/ 3 2 6
501/ 9 8 4 PROG 1.2
701/ 4 9 6
901/ 6 7 4 PROG 1.2
1101/ 5 6 6
1301/ 8 1 4 PROG 1.2
2501/ 9 2 4 PROG 1.2
1501/ 4 3 4 PROG 1.2
1701/ 7 8 6
1901/ 6 9 6
2101/ 5 4 6
3101/ 15 16 6
3301/ 14 19 6
3501/ 16 19 6
3701/ 15 14 6
4101/ 25 26 6
4301/ 24 29 6
4501/ 26 29 6
4701/ 25 24 6
VERIFY
RENUMBER
1
RETURN
GROUP CREATE NAME SHELL

ELEMENT TYPE 2404
RETURN EDIT EXTRACT
GROUP CREATE NAME SHELL1

ELEMENT 601 TO 624
RETURN EDIT EXTRACT
...

© 2019 ESI Group
GROUP CREATE NAME SHELL2

ELEMENT 501 TO 524
RETURN EDIT EXTRACT
GROUP CREATE NAME MEMBRANE

ELEMENT TYPE 2504
RETURN EDIT EXTRACT
GROUP CREATE NAME SOLID

ELEMENT TYPE 3008
RETURN EDIT EXTRACT
SAVE DATA 1700

...
Groups SHELL1 and SHELL2 are created to avoid a problem of interpretation of results
obtained at the angle of the solid element. For a concrete industrial example, this distinction is
not necessary. Making the transition between SHELL and SOLID groups is sufficient.

© 2019 ESI Group
Transition element creation
COMPATIBLITY PENALTY 196*6

MIXING SOLID SHELL
SOLID ELEMENT GROUP $SOLID$
SHELL ELEMENT GROUP $SHELL1$
RETURN
COMPATIBLITY PENALTY 196*6

MIXING SOLID SHELL
SOLID ELEMENT GROUP $SOLID$
SHELL ELEMENT GROUP $SHELL2$
RETURN
GROUP CREATE NAME TRANSITION

ELEMENT TYPE 2903
RETURN EDIT EXTRACT
SAVE DATA1734
EXTRACT
...
Transition elements created are a 2903 type. The possibility to group them together in a single
group called TRANSITION is very convenient.

© 2019 ESI Group
Thermal computation
DEFINITION
PLATE
OPTION THERMAL ENTHALPY MULTI
RESTART GEOMETRY
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
ELEMENT GROUP $SOLID$ / C 4.*-3 RHO 1. KX KY KZ 50.*-7
ELEMENT GROUP $SHELL$ / C 4.*-3 RHO 1. KX KY KZ 50.*-7 H 5 --
INTE 902
CONSTRAINT
NODE 1 TO 219 INTERNAL / TT
LOAD
1 IMPOSED TEMPERATURE
NODE 1 TO 219 INTERNAL / TT 100 FT 1
TABLE
1/1 0. 0. 1. 1. 1000. 1.
RETURN
SAVE DATA 702

ALGORITHM OPTIMISE 1
PRECISION ABSOLUTE DISPLA 0.1
TIME INITIAL 0
1. / STORE 1
1000. / STORE 1
RETURN
SAVE DATA TRANSIENT 702
TEMPERATURE TRANSIENT SHELL CARD 1 2

...
A model of thermal shell with stations (label INTE) whose number of stations is identical to the
one used before in the mechanical shell element is used.
The TRANSIENT TEMPERATURE command allows to transmit thermal results to the
thermomechanical computation.
Input data of the thermomechanical problem
SEARCH DATA1734
DEFINITION
PLATE

© 2019 ESI Group
OPTION BEAM MULTI THERM

RESTART GEOMETRY
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
ELEMENT GROUP $SOLID$ / E 196000 NU 0.33 YIELD 196. MODEL 1 --
LX LY LZ 2.*-5
ELEMENT GROUP $SHELL$ / E 196000 NU 0.33 YIELD 196. MODEL 1 --
H 5 INTE 902 LX LY 2.*-5
ELEMENT GROUP $TRANSITION$ / E 196*6 SHAPE 1
CONSTRAINT
LINE NODE 1 3 / UY UZ RY RZ
LINE NODE 1 7 / UX UZ RX RZ
PLANE NODE 7 6 16 / UY RX RZ
PLANE NODE 3 4 14 / UX RY RZ
N 5 15 25 / UX UY RX RY RZ
N 7 / UX UY UZ RX RZ
N 3 / UX UY UZ RY RZ
N 1 / UX UY UZ RX RY RZ
LOAD
1 PRESSURE
ELEMENT GROUP $SOLID$ / EX EY EZ -2.*-3 LOCAL
ELEMENT GROUP $SHELL$ / EX EY -2.*-3 LOCAL
ELEMENT GROUP $MEMBRANE$ / PZ 0.1 FT 1
ELEMENT GROUP $SHELL$ / PZ 0.1 FT 1
TABLE
1/ 1 0 0 10 0 15 5
RETURN
SAVE DATA 712

EXTRACT MATERIAL PROPERTIES
TRANSIENT NON LINEAR STATIC

BEHAVIOR PLASTIC UPDATE
ALGORITHM OPTIMISE 1 ITERATION 30
PRECISION ABSOLUTE FORCE 1 DISPLA 1*-9 ENERGY 1*-21
TIME INITIAL 0
10. / STORE 1
10.02 / STORE 1
RETURN

© 2019 ESI Group
SEARCH DATA 713

ASSIGNER 19 TRAN713.TIT
TRANSIENT NON LINEAR STATIC

BEHAVIOR PLASTIC UPDATE
ALGORITHM OPTIMISE 1 ITERATION 30
PRECISION ABSOLUTE FORCE 1 DISPLA 1*-9 ENERGY 1*-21
INITIAL CONDITION RESTART CARD 2
TIME INITIAL 10.02
10.1 STEP 0.02 / STORE 4
10.5 STEP 0.02 / STORE 5
15 STEP 0.10 / STORE 5
RETURN

© 2019 ESI Group
8.11 Different Types of Media
8.11 DIFFERENT TYPES OF MEDIA

8.11.1 General
SYSTUS is able to integrate certain special phenomena by applying the notion of media.
Different types of media are available depending on the computation option.
The REGULATION-ADJUSTMENT medium is available with all the options. It can be used:
l to regulate an input data in order to respect a threshold
l or to adjust an input data in order to obtain a desired result.
Nine media are available for contact problems.

The GAP and INTERFACE media are reserved for applications involving small relative
displacements. These media are available with the TWO- DIMENSIONAL, THREE-
DIMENSIONAL, AXISYMMETRICAL SHELL, SPATIAL SHELL and SPATIAL BEAM
computation options.
The PLANE medium is designed for problems of contact involving large relative displacements
between a deformable body and rigid plane. The PLANE medium is available with the TWO-
DIMENSIONAL, THREE- DIMENSIONAL, AXISYMMETRICAL SHELL, SPATIAL
SHELL and SPATIAL BEAM computation options.
For contact with large relative displacements, the RECTANGLE, CYLINDER, CONE,
SPHERE and TORUS media are designed for problems of contact between a deformable body
and one or several rigid targets. These targets can be moving bodies. These media are available
with the THREE-DIMENSIONAL, SPATIAL SHELL and SPATIAL BEAM computation
options.
The SL2D medium (slide-line) can be used for problems involving 2D or 3D contact between
two slide-lines a priori deformable. This medium is available with the following computation
options: THREE- DIMENSIONAL, SPATIAL SHELL, SPATIAL BEAM, SPATIAL
TRUSS, TWO-DIMENSIONAL, AXISYMMETRICAL SHELL, PLANE TRUSS, PLANE
BEAM. This medium can be used to simulate sliding, sticking, tangentially sticking and friction
contact conditions.
The TRAJECTORY medium is available for the continuous media options (TWO-
DIMENSIONAL option, THREE- DIMENSIONAL option), the SPATIAL SHELL and
BEAM option, the PLATE option, the PLANE BEAM options, the TRUSS options and the
whole set of thermal and electromagnetic options.
It allows to take into account isolated loads which vary as a function of time along a trajectory.
With the thermal options, 3 other types of media are available:
The RADIATION medium allows the simulation of radiation phenomena in convex or concave
cavities constituted by grey surfaces.
The TCNT medium or thermal contact medium allows to represent the heat transfer conditions
at the interface of 2 materials.
The HEAT medium allows the simulation of thermal exchanges in a pipe.

© 2019 ESI Group
Finally with the electromagnetism options, the following types of media are available.
The inductor media (BAR, ARC, COIL) allow to take inductors into account for magnetostatic
applications (option MAGNETIC SCALAR).
The CONDUCTOR medium allows the coupling between external electric circuit equations
and a finite elements model (option MAGNETIC VECTOR).
The BEM medium allows to use the Boundary Element Method to avoid the meshing of a
linear material.
All the data which are necessary to describe the media are introduced by the command MEDIA
of DEFINITION (section 4.6).
All the media need a special treatment before solving. This treatment is performed by the
routine MEDIA (section 6.5).
The solving routine TRANSIENT NON LINEAR can take all the types of media into account.
Only some media can be integrated with the routine SOLVE (inductor media).
With the routine TRANSIENT NON LINEAR, special files (values and pressures) are
associated with some media (see 3.1). These files can be treated using the classical SYSTUS
routines (chapter 13).

© 2019 ESI Group
8.11.2 Regulation-Adjustment Medium

Purpose
This medium is available with all the computation options and can be integrated only with the
TRANSIENT NON LINEAR routine.
It performs a control loop on the finite elements computation itself.
It allows:
l to regulate an input data in order to respect a threshold
l or to adjust an input data in order to obtain a desired result.
The input variable of the medium is a function of the degrees of freedom associated with one or
several nodes.
The output of the medium can be components of:
l material properties of the elements
l properties of the media
l vectors
l tables
With the REGULATION mode, the medium can work under transient or steady state
conditions. With the ADJUSTMENT mode, only steady state analyses can provide coherent
results. In this case, the software adjusts the input data by successive iterations.

© 2019 ESI Group
Data Set
The data defined with the command MEDIA of the routine DEFINITION are:
l with the REGULATION mode
MEDIA
---
REGULATION / NODE n DISP d
VECTOR v COMPONENT c
or MATERIAL ma COMPONENT c
or MEDIUM mi COMPONENT c
or TABLE t COMPONENT c
SET POINT f
l with the ADJUSTMENT mode
MEDIA
---
ADJUSTMENT/ NODE n DISP d
VECTOR v COMPONENT c
or MATERIAL ma COMPONENT c
or MEDIUM mi COMPONENT c
or TABLE t COMPONENT c
SET POINT f VMIN vmin VMAX vmax
Definition of the medium input variable

NODE n:
n: external number
if n < 0:
then the table (-n) gives the list of nodes defining the input variable and the corresponding
treatment:
TABLE
(-n) / l <list of nodes>
l if l = 0: sum over the nodes of the quantity defined by the label DISP=d
l if l = 1: average value (over the nodes) of the quantity defined by the label DISP=d
l if l = 2: root mean square value (over the nodes) of the quantity defined by DISP=d
l if l = 3: maximum value of the quantity defined by DISP=d
l if l = 4: minimum value of the quantity defined by DISP=d
DISP d:

© 2019 ESI Group
d: number of the displacement component

if d < 0:then the table (-d) gives a list of components and the corresponding treatment :
TABLE
(-d) / t <list of components>
l if t = 0 sum of the components
l if t = 1 average value
l if t = 2 root mean square value
l if t = 3 maximum value
l if t = 4 minimum value
Definition of the medium output : (quantity to be regulated or to be adjusted)

VECTOR v : number of the vector
MATERIAL ma : number of the material
MEDIA mi : number of the medium
TABLE t: number of the table
COMPONANT c: number of the component
if c < 0, then the table (-c) gives the list of components to regulate
TABLE
(-c) / l<list of components>
The meaning of the VECTOR components is given on section 6.3.1.3. For the definition of the
MATERIAL and MEDIUM components, see § 18.3 (common blocks COMMAT and
COMMIL).
Definition of the control function:
l with the REGULATION mode
SET POINT f: number of table describing the control function
This table must be introduced using simplified FORTRAN or a user subroutine external to
SYSTUS
TABLE
f / FORTRAN
FUNCTION F(X)
DIMENSION X(8)
C
C X(1) : current time
C X(2) : input variable value at the current time
C X(3) : input variable value at the previous time step
C X(4) : time step
C X(5) : time derivative of the input variable
C X(6) : second derivative of the input variable...
C X(7) : time integral of the input variable since the

© 2019 ESI Group
C beginning of the simulation

C X(8) : value of the control function at the previous time
C step
...
RETURN
END
The function f returns the coefficient by which the initial values of the different components of
the quantity to be regulated will be multiplied.
l with the ADJUSTMENT mode:
SET POINT f VMIN vmin VMAX vmax :

f: number of the table defining the desired value in time.
The software will automatically calculate, at each time step, the coefficient by which the
different components of the quantity to be adjusted will be multiplied.
The user can bound this value by
vmin: minimum value of the quantity to be adjusted
vmax: maximum value.
Print-Out and Storage of the Results

At each time step, the software displays the medium's state. Moreover, this state is stored on the
values part of the transient file. 20 values are stored:
l 1: Current time
l 2: medium input variable at the current time
l 3-4: (free)
l 5: time derivative of the input variable
l 6: second derivative of the input variable
l 7: time integral of the input variable since the beginning of the simulation
l 8: value of the control function at the previous time step
l 9-17: (free)
l 18: value of the control function at the current time
l 19-20: (free)

© 2019 ESI Group
8.11.3 Contacts
SYSTUS has contact media dedicated to applications involving:
l small relative displacements between parts,
l moderate relative displacements,
l generalized 2D contacts,
l generalized 3D contacts.
In the first case, we are in presence of nodal contact. Contact conditions are processed on pair
of nodes. In the second case, the contact is between a node and an element. In the last two
cases, contact conditions are generalized and depend on the deformation of the structures taken
into account.
Different contact media can be used in the same analysis, but must not have any common
nodes.
Solution - recommendations
Formulation of contact problems requires updating of the first member matrix on each iteration
of the solution routine (OPTIMIZE 1 on the ALGORITHM command or the TRANSIENT
NON-LINEAR procedure).
However, convergence difficulties occur sometimes. One possible reason is that the tangent
matrix of some elements is not compatible with a full Newton-Raphson procedure. Thus, it is
possible to compute the tangent matrix of such elements only when requested. The label
MATRIX m must be added to the desired MATERIAL PROPERTIES:
l If m = 0: the tangent matrix is not used,
l m = i: the tangent matrix is used every i iteration (i =1 means at each iteration then).
Of course, without the label MATRIX, the element tangent MATRIX is computed as usual.

© 2019 ESI Group
Contacts with Small Relative Displacements

GAP Macro-Element
Introduction
This macro-element is used to introduce a GAP between 2 surfaces (contactor zone and target
zone) of one or more basically deformable bodies. If one of the bodies is assumed to be rigid,
the nodes of the corresponding surface must be constrained. Contact conditions can be sliding,
sticking, tangentially sticking or frictional (Coulomb - Orowan model).
Utilization of this macro- element is reserved for applications involving small relative
displacements (hooping type problems for example). Contacts can only occur on pairs of
nodes. A node in the contact zone can only be in contact with a node of the target zone
identified at the start of the analysis, and in a predetermined direction (mean normal to the nodes
concerned on the contactor and target surfaces, and directed from the target to the contactor).
Pairs of nodes which can come into contact, as also the direction of contact, are determined
automatically at the start of the analysis (MEDIUM preprocessing procedure). The nodes of the
contactor and target zones can be the same, with contact conditions relating only to a GAP
supplied by the user.
In the case of shell elements, contact conditions apply to the modeled surfaces of the elements,
and consequently ignore thicknesses and eccentricities.
This contact macro-element is compatible with the following mechanical computation options:
l TWO-DIMENSIONAL option (2D continuous medium)
l THREE-DIMENSIONAL option (3D continuous medium)
l SHELL option.
The GAP macro-element can be used for static and dynamic applications.
Input data
Input data are as follows:
DEFINITION
...
MEDIUM
GAP / = i TARGET= j GAP= g PENALTY= pN --
EPSILON = ε MODEL= m TABLE = t --
GRP = 1 FAST 1 FT = f
...
RETURN
CONTACT = i defines the name ($NAME$) or the number of the group (i) of
surface elements constituting the contactor (one and only one group).
TARGET = j defines the name ($NAME$) or the number of the group (j) of the
surface elements constituting the target (one and only one group).

© 2019 ESI Group
GAP = g defines the gap between the target and contactor zones. If GAP
value g is positive, the gap is assumed to be constant. In the contrary
case, table (-g) defines a space function dependent of the coordinates
of the target zone (user-supplied function or written in simplified
FORTRAN: see 4.15.7).
FAST 1 this label is available to use the older computation algorithm media ;
faster but with all the concomitant obligations concerning description
of geometry.
FT = f defines the table number which is used as time function on the GAP.
The entered value of the GAP is then multiplied by the value of the
function f at time t.
The PENALTY and EPSILON labels are available to the user for imposing relative penalty
coefficient and ε values (target "easing" parameter). By default, pN = 104 for static analyses pN
= 1 for dynamic analyses, and ε = 0.
MODEL = m defines the contact model. By default, the contact condition is assumed to be sliding (m = 3).
Alternatively, we have:
l m = 1: sticking contact (tangential and normal),
l m = 2: tangentially sticking contact
l m = 3 : sliding contact,
l m = 7 : Coulomb - Orowan friction model
In the latter case (m=7), the TABLE label, giving the number of the table containing the
model parameters, must be informed:
TABLE
t / µ, ∆u0, τmax
with:
µ: coefficient of friction,
∆u0: allowable maximum reversible sliding,
τmax : maximum admissible tangential force.
In a general way a friction law expresses the tangential stress (st) as a function of the relative
tangential speed , or the increment of the relative tangential displacement between the
target body and the contactor body.
The function q is introduced in order to regularize the friction law. In SYSTUS:

© 2019 ESI Group
The incremental form of the friction law is written as:
can be understand as a physical parameter of transition between a tangential sticking state

and a sliding state with friction.
τ is the friction stress, its expression depends on the friction model.
For the model of Coulomb:
with
: coefficient of friction
: normal stress
The friction model parameters can be temperature-dependant, applying the normal philosophy
of the program (negative value for reference to a table).
GRP = 1 Mandatory with the new input data for GROUP (see section 1.5).
This macro-element can only be used with the TRANSIENT NON-LINEAR procedure (see
Chapter 12), for static or dynamic applications. The macro-element is compatible with all large
displacement and large strain formulations.
Formulation of contact problems requires updating of the first member matrix on each iteration
of the solution routine (OPTIMIZE 1 on the ALGORITHM command or the TRANSIENT
With a Coulomb friction type interface condition, the first member matrix for the contact is non-
symmetrical. Solution consequently requires, for each iteration, the use of a non-symmetrical
equation solver (NON-SYMMETRICAL label on the METHOD card of the TRANSIENT
For solid or spatial shell three-dimensional problems, it is not recommended to use quadratic
meshes.

© 2019 ESI Group
The TRANSIENT NON- LINEAR procedure creates a TRANSIENT output file. In the
presence of one or more GAP media, this file contains a node PRESSURE file for each stored
computation card or time, containing the following for each node of the contactor zone:
TWO-DIMENSIONAL option:
1 : Rx Components of the contact reaction in the general system of axes
2 : Ry (action of the target plane of the contactor)
3 : Rt Modulus of the tangential force
4 : Rn Normal component of the contact force
5, 6 Components of relative displacement at the instant of contact, in the
general system of axes
9 : tc Instant of contact
THREE-DIMENSIONAL and SPATIAL SHELL options
1 : Rx
Components of the contact reaction in the general system of axes
2 : Ry
(action of the target plane on the contactor)
3 : Rz
4 : Rt Modulus of tangential force
5 : Rn Normal component of contact force
7, 8, 9 Components of relative displacement at the instant of contact, in the
Applicable post-processing procedure
With CURVE TRANSIENT and PRINT TRANSIENT procedures, pressure type results can
be analyzed using the PRESSURE label.

© 2019 ESI Group
INTERFACE Macro-Element
Introduction
The INTERFACE macro-element is used to introduce interface between 2 surfaces (contactor
zone and target zone) of one or more basically deformable bodies. If one of the bodies is
assumed to be rigid, the nodes of the corresponding surface must be constrained. Contact
conditions can be sliding, sticking, tangentially sticking or frictional (Coulomb-Orowan model).
Utilization of this macro- element is reserved for applications involving small relative
displacements (hooping type problems for example). Contacts can only occur on pairs of
nodes. A node in the contact zone can only be in contact with a node of the target zone
identified at the start of the analysis, and in a predetermined direction (direction given by the
vector connecting the two nodes, or mean normal to the nodes concerned on the contactor and
target surfaces, and directed from the target to the contactor).
Pairs of nodes which can come into contact, and contact direction are determined automatically
at the start of analysis. By comparison with the GAP macro-element, initial gap in this case is
obtained directly from the initial positions of the contactor and target nodes (and consequently
included in the mesh). Furthermore, in the case of a shell element model, the thickness of the
elements is taken into account in the contact conditions.
In the case of beam elements, the contact condition apply to the modeled fibers of the elements,
and ignore sections and eccentricities. Futhermore, for the contact between two beam elements,
only the use of the predetermined direction, given by the vector connecting the two nodes of the
contact pairs of nodes, is allowed (DIRECTION = 1).
This contact macro-element is compatible with the following mechanical computation options:
l TWO-DIMENSIONAL option (2D continuous medium),
l THREE-DIMENSIONAL option (3D continuous medium),
l SHELL option,
l BEAM option.
The macro-element can be used for static and dynamic applications.

Input data
DEFINITION
...
MEDIUM
INTERFACE / CONTACTOR = i TARGet= j DIRECTION = in --
PENAlty= pN EPSILON = ε MODEL = m --
TABLE = t GRP = 1
...
RETURN

© 2019 ESI Group
DIRECTION = in indicates the contact direction to be taken into account:

by default or
l if in ≤ 0, the contact direction is obtained by averaging the normals at the target and
contactor nodes,
l if in > 0, the contact direction is colinear with the vector connecting the target and
contactor nodes.
Other labels are identical to those used with the GAP macro-element.
Solution - recommendations (see Chapter 8.11.3 – Part: Contact with Small Relative
Displacements)
Applicable post-processing procedures
With CURVE TRANSIENT and PRINT TRANSIENT procedures, pressure type results can
be analyzed using the PRESSURE label.
Contact with Relative Moderate Displacements

See the command ASSOCIATE (Chapter 6.3.8 – Part: Contact between two Meshes).

© 2019 ESI Group
Generalized 2D Contacts
PLANE Macro-Element
Introduction
This macro-element is used for generalized contact problems (involving large displacements),
between a deformable body and a rigid plane. Contact conditions can be sliding, sticking,
tangentially sticking or frictional (Coulomb-Orowan model).
Macro-element data are:
l "Contactor" zone defined by a set of (surface) elements,
l Rigid target body, which can be moving (translational movement only), and which must be a
plane.
Contact direction is the direction normal to the target plane.

If the elements representing the "contactor" zone have a thickness (shell elements), the contact
conditions involve a gap corresponding to the half- thickness at the contactor node. The
thickness taken at the contactor node is equal to the greatest thickness of the elements connected
to this node.
In the case of beam elements, contact conditions apply to the modeled fibers of the elements,
and consequently ignore sections and eccentricities.
This contact macro- element is compatible with the following two- dimensional mechanical
computation options:
l TWO-DIMENSIONAL option (2D continuous medium)
l AXISYMMETRICAL SHELL option
l PLANE BEAM option
l TRUSS PLANE option
This macro-element can be used for both static and dynamic applications.

© 2019 ESI Group
Input data
DEFINITION
...
MEDIUM
PLANE / CONTACTOR= i PLANE= np --
PENALTY = pN EPSILON = ε MODEL = m --
TABLE = t GRP = 1
...
LOAD
...
MEDIUM mi / UX = ux UY = uy UZ = uz FT = f (R)
...
TABLE
...
np / x1,y1,z1 x2,y2,z2 x3,y3,z3 x4,y4,z4
...
RETURN
CONTACTOR = i defines the name ($NAME$) or the number of the group (i) of surface elements
constituting the contactor (one and only one group).
PLANE = np gives the number of a TABLE (np) containing the data defining the target plane.
This plane is defined by 4 points. The first three points define the plane proper, and
the fourth the exterior of the target. Displacement of the target plane in time can be
imposed, by applying a LOAD to the medium.
The PENALTY and EPSILON labels are available to the user for imposing relative penalty
coefficient and ε values (target "easing" parameter). By default, p N = 10 4 for static analyses
and pN = 1 for dynamic analyses, and ε = 0.

© 2019 ESI Group
MODEL = m defines the contact model. By default, the contact condition is assumed to be sliding (m = 3).
Alternatively, we have:
m = 1 : sticking contact (tangential and normal),
m = 2 : tangentially sticking contact
m = 3 : sliding contact,
m = 7 : Coulomb - Orowan friction model
In the latter case (m=7), the TABLE label, giving the number of the table containing the
model parameters, must be supplied:
TABLE
with :
µ: coefficient of friction,
∆u0: allowable maximum reversible sliding,
τmax : maximum admissible tangential force.
The friction model parameters can be temperature-dependant, applying the normal philosophy
of the program (negative value for reference to a table).
GRP = 1 Mandatory with the new input data for GROUP (see section 1.5).
l This macro-element can only be used with the TRANSIENT NON-LINEAR procedure (see Chapter
12), for static or dynamic applications. The macro-element is compatible with all large
displacement and large strain formulations.
l Formulation of contact problems requires updating of the first member matrix on each iteration of
the solution routine (OPTIMIZE 1 on the ALGORITHM command of the TRANSIENT NON-
LINEAR procedure).
l With a Coulomb friction type interface condition, the first member matrix for the contact is non-
symmetrical. Solution consequently requires, for each iteration, the use of a non-symmetrical
equation solver (NON-SYMMETRICAL label on the METHOD card of the TRANSIENT NON-
LINEAR procedure).
l For solid or spatial shell three-dimensional problems, it is not recommended to use quadratic
meshes.
The TRANSIENT NON- LINEAR procedure creates a TRANSIENT output file. In the
presence of one or more PLANE media, this file contains a node PRESSURE file for each
stored computation card or time, containing the following for each node of the contactor zone:

© 2019 ESI Group
TWO-DIMENSIONAL and SHELL AXISYMMETRICAL options:

2 : Ry (action of the target plane of the contactor)
3 : Rt Modulus of the tangential force
4 : Rn Normal component of the contact force
5, 6 Components of relative displacement at the instant of contact, in
the general system of axes
THREE-DIMENSIONAL, SPATIAL SHELL and SPATIAL BEAM options
2 : Ry (action of the target plane on the contactor)
3 : RZ
4 : Rt Modulus of tangential force
5 : Rn Normal component of contact force
Applicable post-processing procedure
With CURVE TRANSIENT and PRINT TRANSIENT, pressure type results can be analyzed
using the PRESSURE label.
SL2D Macro-Element
Introduction
The macro-element SL2D (Slide-line) is used for generalized contact problems (involving
relative large displacements) between two edges a priori deformable. The edges are assumed to
lie in a plane (fixed in time) defined by the user.
Macro-element data are defined by a contactor and target zone. These zones are represented by
a set of 1D elements with their normal oriented outward.
If one of the two bodies is assumed to be rigid, then all the nodes attached to this body must be
linked (CONSTRAINT procedure). The possible movement of this rigid body must be
specified using the usual SYSTUS input data (LOAD procedure). Contact conditions can be
sliding, sticking, tangentially sticking or frictional (Coulomb, Tresca and Coulomb-Orowan
models).
Where the elements representing the 'contactor' zone have a thickness (shell elements), the
contact conditions involve a gap corresponding to the half-thickness at the contactor node. The
thickness taken into account at the contactor node is equal to the largest thickness of the
elements connected to this node.

© 2019 ESI Group
Input data
This contact macro- element is compatible with the following two- dimensional mechanical
l TWO-DIMENSIONAL
l THREE-DIMENSIONAL
l AXISYMETRIC SHELL
l PLANE BEAM
l TRUSS PLANE
DEFINITION
...
MEDIUM
SL2D / CONTACTOR = i TARGET = j MODEL = m --

TABLE = t EPSILON = ε PENALTY = pN --
EXTRACT = e (R) DIRECTION = xy GRP = 1
…
CONTACTOR = i defines the name $NAME$ or the number of the group i of surface
elements constituting the contactor (one and only one group).
TARGET = j defines the name $NAME$ or the number of the group j of surface
elements constituting the target (one and only one group).
PENALTY = The contact formulation is based on a penalty method. Normal
penalty coefficient is calculated from and the maximal
diagonal term of the stiffness matrix associated with the
contactor node following the formula .
By default = 1.
EPSILON = ε defines the regularization parameterε.
The normal penalty coefficient is regularized as such
the contact repulsive force (normal component) is function of the
gap g (distance from the contact node and the target surface):

© 2019 ESI Group
Smoothing of the normal contact repulsive force

By default, this parameter is 10-3.
MODEL = m defines the model contact.
By default, the contact is assumed to be sliding (m=3).
Alternatively we have:
m = 1: perfect sticking contact
m = 2: tangentially sticking contact
m = 3: sliding contact
m = 4: friction with Coulomb's model
m = 5: friction with Tresca's model
m = 7: friction with Coulomb–Orowan's model
in the last three cases, the TABLE label, giving the number of the table containing the friction
model parameters , must be specified:
: Coulomb's friction coefficient
: maximum admissible shear
: tangential penalty relative coefficient ( )
Coulomb's model:
TABLE
t /
Tresca's model:
TABLE
t /
Coulomb–Orowan's model:

© 2019 ESI Group
TABLE
t /
By default, the tangential penalty is equal to to the normal penalty coefficient ( ).

However, it is possible to modify this parameter when the convergence is difficult to reach for
friction problems.
EXTRACT= e defines the level of printout.
By default, this parameter is 0 (no display).
If e = 1: printout of incremental contact condition (sticking, sliding,
Coulomb, Tresca), from the normal distance (target–node) and the
tangential distance (target–node); for each increment.
If e = 2: same printout as defined above, but for each iteration.
If e = 3: printout of the parametric coordinate of the contactor node.
(R) defines the local reference frame of the slide-line plane (local z-axis
must be normal to the plane (cf. 1.4.5)).
DIRECTION = xy defines the orientation of the contactor and target elements with
respect to the origin of the local reference frame.
x : defines the orientation of the contactor elements.
y : defines the orientation of the contactor elements.
x (or y) = 0, is used to orient the normals of contactor elements (or
target normals) from the origin of the local reference frame towards
the element (default).
x (or y) = 1, is used to orient the normals of contactor elements (or
target normals) from the element towards the origin of the local
reference frame.
GRP = 1 Mandatory with the new input data for GROUP.
l The formulation of contact problems imposes to update the left-hand side matrix at each iteration.
Therefore the label OPTIMIZE 1, after the command ALGORITHM in the TRANSIENT procedure
is mandatory.
l With a friction interface type condition, the left-hand side matrix related to contact is non-
symmetric. Therefore the label NON SYMMETRICAL, after the command METHOD in the
TRANSIENT procedure is mandatory.
l The most critical point in contact problems is the choice of the penalty coefficient. From a
numerical point of view, it must be the lowest possible. On the other hand, it must be big enough
to ensure the required precision.
l To determine the time step, and regarding the contact only, to multiply the penalty coefficient by
10, imposes to divide the time step by 10, leading to a problem that will converge with difficulty.
Note that the time step can be driven by non-linearity of the behavior law and that the modification
of the contact penalty would not necessarily influence the time step.
PRESSURE file

© 2019 ESI Group
Data stored in the PRESSURE file are the following:

1 normal component of the contact in the global reference frame)
2
3
4 tangential component of the contact force in the global reference frame
5
6
7 KMAX
8 number of the contact medium
9 internal number of the contact segment
11 reduced coordinate on the contact segment

© 2019 ESI Group
Generalized 3DContact
PLANE Macro-Element
This contact macro-element is compatible with all three-dimensional mechanical computation
options available with the TRANSIENT NON-LINEAR procedure, namely:
l THREE-DIMENSIONAL option (3D continuous medium)
l SHELL SPATIAL option
l BEAM SPATIAL option
l TRUSS SPATIAL option
This macro-element is described in details in § PLANE Macro-Element . We describe in this

section only the content of the PRESSURE file:
1: Rx
Components of the contact reaction in the general system of axes
2: Ry
(action of the target plane on the contactor)
3: RZ
4: Rt Modulus of tangential force
5: Rn Normal component of contact force
RECTANGLE, CYLINDER, CONE, SPHERE and TORUS Macro-Elements
Introduction
These macro-elements are designed for problems of contact between a deformable body (with
large relative displacements) and one or several rigid targets possibly mobile.
Two contact formulations are available: a penalty method and an updated Lagrangian method.
Contact conditions can be sliding, sticking, sticking in tangential direction or friction (Coulomb-
Orowan's model).
Description of targets
They are described as follows:
MEDIUM
name / CONTACTOR i PENALTY EPSILON ε --
UNLOADING val MODEL m DIRECTION n --
EXTRACT e TABLE t "surface parameters" (R) --
GRP =1
CONTACTOR i defines the number or the name ($NAME$) of the group (i) of
surface elements constituting the contactor (one and only one group).

© 2019 ESI Group
PENALITY The penalty coefficient kN is defined by :

where is a measure of the local stiffness at the
corresponding node. By default, = 103.
EPSILON ε smoothing parameter of the normal repulsion force. For the updated
Lagrangian method, it also corresponds to the precision on normal
and tangential distances which is the augmentation cut-off criterion.
UNLOADING val if val > 0, this label is used to process the return of the target:
with drawing of the tool.
Caution, when the target is tangentially sliding on an obstacle, this
label is not recommended.
MODEL m = 1 : perfect sticking contact
m = 2 : sticking contact in tangential direction
m = 3 : sliding contact
m = 7 : contact with friction
m = 10i : model i with augmented Lagrangian
DIRECTION n ≥ 0 contact with the exterior of the surface (default)
n < 0 : contact with the interior of the surface (see figures below)
EXTRACT allows printing of some contact results
e = 0 : none (default)
e=1:
l condition of contact (sliding, sticking, Coulomb, Tresca)
l normal distance (target-node)
l tangential distance (target-node) for each increment
e = 2 : idem 1 for each iteration
TABLE t / µ,τmax, pT :
µ: Coulomb's friction coefficient
τmax: maximum admissible shear (Tresca's friction)
pT : penalty related to friction terms is :
"surface parameters" see figures hereafter
R local axes of the surface (usual SYSTUS conventions)
GRP = 1 mandatory with the new input data for GROUP (see section 1.5).

© 2019 ESI Group
Surfaces
RECTANGLE CYLINDER
CONE SPHERE
TORUS
Target displacements
Local axes of the target body (O', i, j, k) is initially defined by the commands associated with
(R). Then the targets can move either in translation or rotation with respect to axes defined by
the user or with respect to initial local axes (command LOCAL).

© 2019 ESI Group
The chaining of commands corresponds to operation in succession. So the user must be very
cautious when writing the commands.
Example:
MEDIA
TORUS / CONTACT 1 EPSIL 1.*-6 MODE 3 PENAL 1.*-3 --
EXTRA 2 XX .238 ZZ 1. DX .105 R .005
EXTRA 2 XX -.119 YY .2061140 ZZ 1. PSI 120 DX .105 R .005
EXTRA 2 XX -.119 YY -.2061140 ZZ 1. PSI 240 DX .105 R .005
CONSTRAINT
PLANE NODE 1 2 16002 / UX UY UZ
LOAD
1
MEDIUM 1 TO 3 / UX = -.045 FT 1 LOCAL
MEDIUM 1 TO 3 / RZ = 31.415926 FT 1
MEDIUM 1 TO 3 / UZ = 0.3 FT 1
TABLE
1 / 1 0. 0. 1000. 1000.
RETURN
Three tori are defined, local axis i is oriented toward the origin of the global axes (PSI in the
definition).
Then, these tori describe a helicoidal movement around global axis K while coming closer to
this axis.
l UX = - 0,045 FT 1 LOCAL → coming closer to K
l Then a rotation of the K axis around the origin of the global axes is made.
l Finally a translation along K is made.
Utilization recommendations
l The most critical point for contact problems is the choice of the penalty coefficient. In a numerical
point of view, this coefficient must be the lowest possible. On the contrary, it must be sufficient to
reach the requested precision.
The penalty coefficient is calculated with respect to the local stiffness. The global stiffness may be
inferior: e.g., surface stiffness of a pylon is generally superior to its global stiffness at the top. In
this case, it is recommended, in order to improve time calculation, to enter a penalty coefficient
inferior to 103 (default value).
l A solution is to use an updated Lagrangian method (activated if the model is superior to 100). The
algorithm, with some additional iterations, reaches the requested precision (EPSILON). The
penalty coefficient must not be too much reduced because the computation time will increase.
l Adjustment of the tangential penalty can help solving some convergence problems but it is only
recommended in critical case. Remember that the program calculated penalty coefficient is then
modified (kt = 1 by default).

© 2019 ESI Group
l Multiply the penalty coefficient by 10 demands - for a problem which converges with difficulty - to
divide time step by 10. It should be noticed, that the time step can be driven by a non-linear
behavior law and that the modification of the contact penalty coefficient will not have any influence
on this time step.
Post-processing
Printing
The EXTRACT label associated with each medium is used to print contact conditions, normal
distance target-node and tangential displacement increment target-node (tangential distance).
In the PRESSURE file, are stored
1 components of the normal reaction (global axes)
2
3
4 components of the tangential reaction (global axes)
5
6
7 components of the tangential displacement increment (global axes)
8
9
14 penalty coefficient K
SL2D Macro-Element
This contact macro-element is compatible with the following three-dimensional mechanical
l THREE-DIMENSIONAL
l SHELL
l BEAM
l TRUSS SPATIAL
This macro-element is described in details in § SL2D Macro-Element.

SC3D Macro-Element
The SC3D macro-element (slide curve) allows the model of the 3D contact between deformable
solids with a relatively large displacement. The contact is executed between a group of surface
elements of the contactor solid and a group of surface elements of the target solid.
Several mechanical models of the contact are available: sticky models slippery models with or
without friction.
Two contact numerical formulations are available: the penalty method and updated Langrangian
method.
The SC3D macro-element is applicable in the 3D mechanical calculation options:

© 2019 ESI Group
l Three-dimensional continuous medium.

l Spatial shell.
In the presence of shell elements, the possible gap between the modeled surface (often the
average surface of the shell) and the real surface of the contact ( the upper or lower surface of
the shell) is taken into account to express the conditions of contact. This gap is a function of the
local thickness and the local offset of the shell elements
Pre-processing data
Under DEFINITION the MEDIUM command defines surfaces in potential contact, the
mechanical and numerical properties of the contact
DEFINITION
…
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
…
MEDIUM
SC3D /CONTACTOR= i TARGET=j
MODEL=m TABLE=t
PENALTY = EPSILON= ε
LANGRANGIAN= g PRECISION= β
TOLERANCE= γ EXTRACT= x
GRP=1
CONSTRAINT
…
RETURN
CONTACTOR =i supplies the name or the number of the group of surface elements
of the solid contactor, the normal for these elements should be
directed to the outside of the solid.
TARGET = j supplies the name or the number of the group of surface elements
of the solid target, the normal for these elements should be directed
to the outside of the solid

© 2019 ESI Group
MODEL=m defines the mechanical model of the contact, by default m=3

m = 1: sticky contact in the normal and tangential directions
m = 2: sticky contact in the tangential direction
m = 3: sliding contact without friction
m = 4 : contact with Coulomb friction, friction threshold S = µ fn
m = 5 : contact with Tresca friction, constant friction threshold
S = f0
m = 7: contact with Coulomb-Orowan friction, friction threshold S
= µ fn si µ fn < f0, else S = f0
PENALTY = pN defines the normal contact stiffness proportionally to the solid
contactor local stiffness (K), pN is the proportionality coefficient
kN = pN . K, by default pN = 1
EPSILON = ε defines the value of the regulation parameter in the relation normal
contact force-normal strain (or gap) by default ε = 0
TABLE= t supplies the table number that defines the characteristics of the
friction
pT defines the tangential stiffness of the contact,

kT = pT . kN , default pT = 1.

© 2019 ESI Group
LAGRANGIAN=g the updated Lagrangian numerical method allows to improve the

precision of the contact and to check in a precise manner the
contact condition even in the presence of a weak or moderate
penalty factor pN. The value g defines the geometrical precision
required in order to satisfy the contact relations. It is an absolute
value, by default g = 10-3
PRECISION= β defines the relative precision with which the position of the point
of projection of a contactor node on the target surface is calculated,
by default β = 10-3.
TOLERANCE= γ defines the tolerance of contact loss by sliding of a contactor node
on a target surface mesh, γ is a relative value being expressed with
respect to the size of the target mesh, by default γ = 0.05.
EXTRACT= x specifies the level of extraction performed during the resolution, by
default x = 0
x = 1 extracts the strains and contact forces at the end of each
increment.
x = 2 extracts the strains and contact forces at the end of each
iteration.
x = 4 carries out a reduced extraction at each iteration.
GRP= 1 is necessary in the presence of CONTACTOR and TARGET
element groups defined by their number
After the DEFINITION command, the MEDIUM (EXTRACT) procedure carries out a look-
ahead of the contact geometry and stores the processed information in the MEDIUM file. In the
presence of the EXTRACT label, this information is edited and is comprised of:
l the list of nodes of the contactor surface,
l the list of elements of the target surface,
l the shift value at the contactor nodes,
l the value of the extension in the target meshes, to affect an influence domain of the target
elements.
Resolution
Under the NON LINEAR TRANSIENT command it is advised to use of the following
parameters:
Used to control the convergence of force calculation. (by default)

l ALGORITHME OPTIMISER 1
to update the left-hand side matrix at every iteration of the incremental calculation.
l NON-SYMETRICAL METHOD
In the presence of friction models 4, 5 and 7, for which the left-hand side matrix is not
symmetric
Results

© 2019 ESI Group
In the PRESSURE record of the TRANSIENT file several information relative to each
contactor node is stored, some are contact state variables especially useful for the progress of the
calculation, the others are exploitable directly by a post-processed procedure.
Components 1 to 3 contact force in the global axes FX, FY, FZ.
Components 4 to 6 contact force in the orthonormed local axes fx, fy, fn.
Components 7 to 8 coordinates of the point, which contacts in curvilinear ot the
corresponding target element.
Components 11 to 13 contact force in the local dual base .
Components 14 à 16 contact deformation in the curvilinear local base .
Components 17 à 18 irreversible sliding strain in the local dual base
Components 20 contact state, equal to 0 if there is no contact, equal to the absolute
number of the target element associated with the contactor node if there
is contact.
Components 24 à 26 components of the vector normal to the target element in contact with the
contactor node
Components 27 à 29 components of the Lagrange's multiplying vector .
Components 30 local stiffness of the contactor solid K.
NIT3D Macro-Element
The NIT3D Macro-element is designed for the simulation of mechanical contact between
deformable bodies meshed with 3D solid elements. It is the implementation of the Nitsche
method under small strain assumption. Only small sliding and frictionless or sticking conditions
are allowed between contact surfaces. The implemented method belongs to master-slave and
“segment to segment” categories. Contact between deformable bodies is indeed detected at
integration points of slave contact elements.
The NIT3D macro-element is compatible with the following mechanical calculation options:
l OPTION THREE-DIMENSIONAL
l OPTION THREE-DIMENSIONAL THERMO ELASTICITY
l OPTION SHELL SPATIAL MULTI
l OPTION SHELL SPATIAL MULTI THERMOELASTICITY
But a NIT3D medium cannot be defined on shell elements.

Input data
Under DEFINITION, the MEDIUM command is used to define the:
l Group that gathers slave surface elements
l Group that gathers master surface elements
l Contact type (sliding or sticking)
l Nitsche parameter GAMA
l Symmetry of the contact stiffness matrix
l Bucket size of the projection algorithm.

© 2019 ESI Group
Surface elements are defined on facets of 3D solid elements. Their nodes also belong to 3D
solid elements. The normal vector of surface elements must be defined outward. No material
properties must be defined on slave 2D contact elements except for the INTEG label that can be
used to increase the number of integration points.
DEFINITION
…
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
…
MEDIUM
NIT3D /SLAVE=iMASTER=jMODEL=m GAMA= γ SYMMETRY=s DX=d TFUSIO=t
CONSTRAINT
…
RETURN
SLAVE=i gives the name (between $...$) or the number of the group of slave
surface elements.
MASTER=j gives the name or the number of the group of master surface elements.
MODEL=m defines the contact model. By default, the contact condition is assumed
to be sliding (m=3). Sticking contact is activated using m=1.
GAMA= γ defines the Nitsche parameter γ . Its value can be estimated with
γ=h/E where h is the minimum size of slave contact elements and E is
the Young modulus at room temperature defined on solid elements of
the slave side. Depending on the simulation, the optimal value for
convergence can be γ=h/E or γ=h/10*E or γ=h/100*E.
SYMMETRY=s The contact stiffness matrix is the sum of two contributions: One is
symmetric and the other is not symmetric. If s=1, only the symmetric
part of the stiffness matrix is computed. Otherwise, both are computed.
If both parts are computed the convergence should be faster but
factorization of the global system of equations is more costly in
computing time and memory. If s is different from 1, the NON
SYMMETRICAL label after “METHOD” in “TRANSIENT NON
LINEAR”, is mandatory. The default value is s=0.
DX=d It defines the bucket size. If there is a large initial gap between
contact surfaces, the projection stage may fail. In that case, d can be
initialized with a value equal to or greater than the initial gap.
TFUSIO=t This label can be used with MODEL=3 to switch from sliding to
sticking conditions when the temperature of the contact surface is
greater than t.

© 2019 ESI Group
After the DEFINITION command, the MEDIUM (EXTRACT) procedure carries out the
projection of surface slave integration points and stores the results in the MEDIUM file. In the
presence of the EXTRACT 3 label the following results are edited for each surface slave
element:
l The related 3D solid element number
l The list of numbers of surface master elements on which its integration points are projected.
l The parametric coordinates of projected points on the master element.
DMP Simulation
The MEDIUM command is mandatory after DMP SUBDOMAIN, in a DMP command file. It
should be pointed out that for some other media, the medium command has to be used before
DMP PARTITION as well as after DMP SUBDOMAIN.
If a thermal and a mechanical simulation are chained in a DMP simulation the NIT3D medium
has to be defined both in the thermal and mechanical part of the command file. Indeed, even if
the NIT3D medium has no effect on the thermal calculation the partitioning is modified when a
NIT3D medium is defined. Furthermore, thermal and mechanical partitioning must be the same
when they are chained.
Resolution
Under the NON LINEAR TRANSIENT command it is advised to use of the following
parameters:
l BEHAVIOR PLASTIC
Used to define value of the force criterion that controls the convergence.
l ALGORITHM OPTIMIZED 1
To update the left-hand side (tangent) matrix at every iteration of the incremental calculation.
l METHOD OPTIMIZED NONSYMMETRICAL
If the value of s does not equal 1 (see above SYMMETRY=s).

l STEP DTMIN … DTMAX … FACC ... FACP …
To activate the automatic time step adjustment procedure.

© 2019 ESI Group
8.11.4 Trajectory Loading Medium

Introduction
The TRAJECTORY medium can be used to take into account isolated loads which vary in
time along a trajectory, for the following mechanical options:
l PLANE BEAM
l GRID
l BEAM (MULTI)
l PLATE
l SPATIAL SHELL (element 2003 only) (MULTI)
l TWO-DIMENSIONAL OPTION
l THREE-DIMENSIONAL OPTION
and for the thermal and electromagnetic options.
This type of medium is only consistent with the NON LINEAR TRANSIENT procedure.
T: trajectory where isolated force is applied

Pi : point where isolated force is applied
si : curvilinear abscissa of point Pi on the trajectory T
si Œ [0,d]
d : trajectory length
: applied force at point Pi
The trajectory T is described by a set of linear elements (one-dimensional elements). The

application points of forces (Pi) and the applied forces are described as loadings of the
TRAJECTORY medium.

© 2019 ESI Group
Definition of the TRAJECTORY medium

Under the command DEFINITION MEDIUM , the user must specify the following data:
MEDIUM
TRAJECTORY / GROUP g GRP=1
g defines the group number of linear elements (one-dimensional elements).

The trajectory must have only one origin (origin of the curvilinear abscissa) and only one end
(curvilinear abscissa d, d : trajectory length).
Definition of Loading on Trajectory

An isolated load force is the only loading which can be applied to the TRAJECTORY medium.
LOAD
1 title/options
F: components of forces which can be applied in the specified axes

following to the computation option.
fi : table number describing the time function by which the applied force
is multiplied :
si : curvilinear abscissa of the application point of force at time 0.

(si 0 can be positive or negative).
gi : table number describing the time function applied to the curvilinear
abscissa si :
si (t) = si 0 + gi (t)
if si (t) œ [o,d], the application point Pi is out of trajectory and the
force is not applied
Storage of Results of TRAJECTORY Medium

The resulting applied force is stored as a function of time in the VALUES file of the
TRANSIENT file. KP (number of degrees of freedom) values are stored.

© 2019 ESI Group
Example
BATCH
DEFINITION
CANTILEVER BEAM
OPTION SPATIAL BEAM
ONE-DIMENSIONAL
NODE
1 / 0 0 0
11 / 1 0 0
ELEMENT
101 / 1 11 10 TYPE 1002
RENUMBER
1 102
$GROUP CREATE NAME G1
ELEMENTS 101 TO 110
RETURN
MATERIAL
E 101 to 110 / E .21*12 NU 0.3 RHO 7800 S .02 * IX 4.577*-5 IY 1.667*-5 --
IZ 6.667*-5 IG 8.333*-5
MEDIUM
TRAJECTORY / GROUP $G1$GRP 1 <--------Description of trajectory
CONSTRAINTS
n 1 / UX UY UZ RX RY RZ
LOAD
1 TEST
MEDIUM 1 / FX 0 FY 0 FZ -100 XX 1 VARI 10 ; description of 5
MEDIUM 1 / FX 0 FY 0 FZ -100 XX 1.1 VARI 10; forces on the
MEDIUM 1 / FX 0 FY 0 FZ -100 XX 1.2 VARI 10 ; trajectory
MEDIUM 1 / FX 0 FY 0 FZ -100 XX 1.3 VARI 10
MEDIUM 1 / FX 0 FY 0 FZ -100 XX 1.4 VARI 10
TABLE
10 / 1 0 0 1000 -1000 ; VELOCITY = 1 (TABLE TYPE 1)
RETURN
MEDIUM EXTRACT
TRANSIENT NONLINEAR STATIC
PRECISION ABSOLUTE DISPLACEMENT 1*-7 FORCE 1*-4
ALGORITHM OPTIMIZE -900
TIME INITIAL 0
0/ REACTION 1 STORE 1
1.5 PAS 0.02/ REACTION 1 STORE 1
RETURN

© 2019 ESI Group

SAVE MEDIUM 302

© 2019 ESI Group
Contents
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Overview 1
1.1.1 Program Execution 1
1.1.2 SYSTUS 3
1.1.3 Data Structure 3
1.1.4 Preprocessing 4
1.1.5 File Management 4
1.1.6 Postprocessing 4
1.1.7 Field of Application 5
1.1.8 Substructuring 6
1.1.9 Command Compatibility with New Data 7
1.1.10 Environment Variables 10
1.2 Basic Concepts 18
1.2.1 Theoretical Basis 18
1.2.2 Discretization 18
1.2.3 Degrees of Freedom 18
1.2.4 Coordinate Systems 19
1.2.5 Boundary Conditions 19
1.2.6 Loads 20
1.2.7 Node and Element Numbering Systems 20
1.2.8 Units 20
1.3 Command Language 21
1.3.1 Overall Operation of SYSTUS 21
1.3.2 Language Characteristics 22
1.3.3 Language Structure 26
1.3.4 Automatic Number Generation 29
1.3.5 Node and Element Groups 30
1.3.6 Comments 31
1.3.7 Batch and Interactive Processing 32
1.4 Notation 35
1.4.1 Boxes 35
1.4.2 Labels and Numbers 36
1.4.3 Prefixes 36
1.4.4 Choice of Labels 37
1.4.5 Coordinate System 38
1.4.6 Node and Element Groups 40
1.5 Groups of Nodes or Elements 41
1.5.1 Creation of a Group 42
CONTENTS
1.5.2 Modification of a Group 48

1.5.3 Printing Information of a Group 49
1.5.4 Suppression of a Group 49
1.5.5 List of Existing Groups 49
1.5.6 Suppression of Temporary Groups 49
1.5.7 Packing of Existing Groups 49
1.5.8 Suppression of Groups 50
1.5.9 Updating Groups with Respect to the Creation Method 50
1.5.10 Suppression of Name Repetition 50
1.5.11 Utilization of Groups 51
1.5.12 Particular Groups: PARTS 51
CHAPTER 2 UTILITY PROCEDURES 53

2.1 Introduction 53
2.2 Operation Sequence Control 54
2.3 Alternative Input File 56
2.3.1 The Command ASSIGN 56
2.3.2 The Command DEASSIGN 57
2.3.3 The Command READ 57
2.3.4 The Command STOP 58
2.3.5 The Command REWIND 58
2.3.6 Comments 58
2.3.7 Examples 59
2.4 Accounting Information 62
2.4.1 The Command TIME 62
2.4.2 The Command END 62
2.5 Modification of Execution Mode 63
2.5.1 The Command MODE 63
2.5.2 The Command PAGING 63
2.6 Utility Routines 64
2.6.1 Executing Operating System Commands 64
2.6.2 The Command HISTORY 64
2.7 Stop the Execution (ONLY IN TRANSIENT COMPUTATION) 65
CHAPTER 3 FILE MANAGEMENT 67

3.1 Introduction 67
3.1.1 The Role of the Files 67
3.1.2 Glossary 68
3.1.3 Brief Description of Files 69
3.2 Permanent Files 71
3.2.1 Identification of a Permanent File 71
3.2.2 The Command SAVE 72
3.2.3 The Command SEARCH 75
3.2.4 The Command DELETE 77
3.2.5 File Labels 78
3.2.6 ASCII File Structure 79
3.2.7 The Command CARD 79

© 2019 ESI Group
CONTENTS
3.3 Communication With Other Programs 80

3.3.1 INPUT/OUTPUT Commands 80
3.3.2 IMPORT/EXPORT Commands 97
3.3.3 PAM-STAMP Interface 99
3.3.4 Convert SYSTUS Results into erf File with PAM-CSM Format 103
3.3.5 Convert SYSTUS/SYSWELD Results into erf File with CATGEN Format 104
CHAPTER 4 DEFINITION 107

4.1 Overview 107
4.1.2 Commands 108
4.1.3 Command DEFINITION RESTART and Label CONTINUE 110
4.2 Title of Problem 113
4.3 The Command OPTION 114
4.3.2 Types of Analysis 115
4.3.3 Thermoelastic Analysis 116
4.3.4 Periodic Structures Subjected to Fourier Decomposed Loads 117
4.4 The Command GEOMETRY 118
4.4.2 Definition of Nodes 119
4.4.3 Coordinate System 120
4.4.4 Translation and Rotation of Coordinate Systems 122
4.4.5 Format of Node Data 123
4.4.6 Definition of Elements 125
4.4.7 The Element Code 126
4.4.8 Format of Element Data 127
4.4.9 Generation of Sequences of Nodes and Elements 128
4.5 Material Properties 132
4.5.2 Input Data 133
4.5.3 Global Definition of Material Properties 134
4.6 Media 136
4.6.3 Comments 137
4.7 Constraints 138
4.7.2 Rigid Constraints 139
4.7.3 Elastic Constraints at Nodes 143
4.7.4 Elastic Constraints over Elements 145
4.7.5 Comments 145
4.8 Loading 146
4.8.2 Definition of Load Case 147
4.8.3 Concentrated Loads 150
4.8.4 Distributed Loads 152
SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL - iii -

© 2019 ESI Group
CONTENTS
4.8.5 Loads Applied to Beams 154

4.8.6 Format of Load Data 156
4.8.7 Comments 157
4.8.8 Example 157
4.8.9 Loads Applied to Media 157
4.9 Releases 158
4.10 The Command RELATION 161
4.10.1 Decoupled Lagrange Multiplier Relations 162
4.10.2 Elimination Relations 164
4.10.3 Example: Structure Supported by another Structure 166
4.11 The Command MASS 169
4.11.2 Conventional Lumped Masses 170
4.11.3 Consistent Masses 170
4.11.4 Comments 171
4.11.5 Thermal Analysis in LINEAR TRANSIENT 171
4.12 The Command DAMPING 172
4.12.2 Conventional Lumped Damping 173
4.12.3 Consistent Damping 173
4.12.4 Comments 174
4.12.5 Thermal Analysis in NON-LINEAR TRANSIENT 174
4.13 The Command TEMPERATURE 175
4.14 The Command VELOCITY 177
4.15 The Command TABLE 178
4.15.2 Arrays 179
4.15.3 Functions Presented as Input Data 180
4.15.4 Functions on File 182
4.15.5 Generation of Functions using Simplified Fortran 185
4.15.6 Generation of Functions using Routines External to SYSTUS 188
4.15.7 Vectorial Functions of Several Variables 189
4.15.8 Text Type Tables 193
4.16 The Command LEVELSETS 195
4.17 The Command CRACKS 197
CHAPTER 5 AUTOMATIC MESH GENERATION 199

5.2 The Routine RECTANGLE 200
5.3 The Routine PARALLELEPIPED 202
5.4 The Routine ONE-DIMENSIONAL 204
5.5 The Routine SECTOR 207
5.5.2 Principles of Operation 207
5.5.4 Node and Element Numbering 210
5.5.5 Program Size Limits 210
- iv - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

© 2019 ESI Group
CONTENTS
5.5.6 Example 211

5.6 The Routine TWO-DIMENSIONAL 212
5.6.4 Generation of Interface Nodes 217
5.6.5 Generation of Macro-Elements 218
5.6.6 Generation of Singularities 220
5.6.7 Problem Size Limits 221
5.6.8 Examples 222
5.6.9 Solids of Revolution or Translation 225
5.7 The Routine THREE-DIMENSIONAL 228
5.7.4 Example 232
5.8 User-Supplied Routines 234
5.8.2 Programming Considerations 235
5.8.3 Example 236
CHAPTER 6 MODIFICATION OF DATA 237

6.2 Routines Called by DEFINITION 238
6.2.1 The Routine MODIFY 238
6.2.2 The Routine ADD 241
6.2.3 The Routine RENUMBER 243
6.2.4 The Routine TRIANGLE 244
6.2.5 The Routine RBE 244
6.2.6 The routine VERIFY 249
6.2.7 The Routine RESTART 250
6.3 Routines Called Outside DEFINITION 251
6.3.1 The Routine MODIFY 251
6.3.2 The Routine RENUMBER 261
6.3.3 The Routine CORRECT 262
6.3.4 The Routine SURFACE 263
6.3.5 The Routine ASSEMBLE 264
6.3.6 The Routine LINEARISE 266
6.3.7 The Routine SECTION 270
6.3.8 The Routine ASSOCIATE 272
6.3.9 The Routine REMESH 297
6.3.10 The Routine RETRO 309
6.3.11 The Routine MULTI 310
6.4 Programmed Meshes 311
6.4.1 Principles 311
6.4.2 Types of Element Generated 312
SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL -v-

© 2019 ESI Group
CONTENTS
6.4.3 Specification of Trajectories 314

6.4.5 Example 317
6.5 The Routine MEDIA 319
CHAPTER 7 VERIFICATION OF DATA 321

7.2 Verification Routines 322
7.2.1 The EXTRACT Command 322
7.2.2 The CHECK Command 324
7.2.3 The LIST Command 331
7.2.4 The VERIFY Command 332
7.2.5 Extraction of the Condensed Matrix of a Substructure 333
7.3 Equilibrium 334
7.3.1 Routine EQUILIBRIUM FORCE 334
7.3.2 Routine EQUILIBRIUM STIFFNESS 335
7.3.3 Routine EQUILIBRIUM MASS 336
7.3.4 Routine EQUILIBRIUM ENERGY 337
INDEX i
- vi - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

© 2019 ESI Group
Contents
CHAPTER 8 TYPES OF ANALYSIS 339

8.1.1 Features Common to Analysis of All Types of Structure 340
8.1.2 Residues 341
8.1.3 Interpretation of Computed Results 341
8.1.4 Printing of Results 342
8.2 Beams and Pin-Jointed Frames 346
8.2.2 Continuous Plane Frames 347
8.2.3 Grids 355
8.2.4 Continuous Three Dimensional Frames 363
8.2.5 Plane Pin-Jointed Frames 378
8.2.6 Three Dimensional Pin-Jointed Frames 383
8.3 Plates and Shells 389
8.3.1 Plates 389
8.3.2 Axisymmetric Shells 395
8.4 Continuous Media 434
8.4.2 Two Dimensional Analysis 435
8.4.3 Three Dimensional Analysis 451
8.5.1 Harmonic Loading of Shells 465
8.5.2 Harmonic; Loading of Three Dimensional Solids 477
8.6 Thermal and Electromagnetic Analysis 487
8.6.1 Thermal Analysis 487
8.6.2 Electromagnetic Analyses 487
8.6.3 Coupled Analyses 488
8.7 Fluid-Structure Interaction 489
8.7.2 Harmonic Loading of Axisymmetric Shells 490
8.7.4 Coaxial Cylinders 500
8.8 Special Elements 505
8.8.1 Element Type 9 (X9XX) 505
8.8.2 Element Defined by User Supplied Subroutine (type 8) 524
8.8.3 Special Constraint Element (type 6) 527
8.9 Shells Specially Designed for Non-Linear Analysis 533
CONTENTS
8.9.1 SHE8 Spatial Shell Option 533

8.9.2 SHED Axisymmetric Harmonic Shell Option 548
8.9.3 SHET Thermal Shell Option 555
8.10 Mixing Option (MULTI Command) 559
8.10.2 Two Dimensional Structures 560
8.10.3 Three Dimensional Structures 562
8.10.4 Routine of Transition Element Creation 565
8.10.5 Limitation on the Use of Post Processing 566
8.10.6 Example 1: Mixing Options for 2D/Beam Elements 567
8.10.7 Example 2: 3D/Space Shell Mixed Problem 569
8.11 Different Types of Media 576
8.11.1 General 576
8.11.2 Regulation-Adjustment Medium 578
8.11.3 Contacts 582
8.11.4 Trajectory Loading Medium 608
INDEX i

© 2019 ESI Group
Contents
CHAPTER 9 LINEAR STATIC SOLUTION 613

9.1 Presentation-General Syntax 613
9.2 Static Solution 615
9.2.1 General Operation 615
9.2.2 Choice of Method of Solution 616
9.2.3 Analyze Check- Rerun 617
9.3 Creation of Elementary Matrices 619
9.3.1 Standard Utilization 619
9.3.2 Utilization of Elimination Methods 621
9.5 Thermoelastic Analysis 623
9.5.1 Basis 623
9.5.2 Temperature File 624
9.5.3 Examples 626
9.6 Contacts for Linear Static Analysis 630
9.6.1 Object 630
9.6.2 Files 631
9.6.3 Data Description 632
9.6.4 Example 633
CHAPTER 10 SUBSTRUCTURING 635

10.1.1 Terminology 635
10.1.2 Example 636
10.2 Method of Analysis 638
10.3 File Management 640
10.3.1 Description of Files 640
10.3.2 Calculation Steps 642
10.4 Optimization of an Analysis 644
10.4.1 Re-Use of Substructures 644
10.4.2 Change of Axes 646
10.4.3 Re-Use of Files 647
10.4.4 Interfacing of Different Types of Structure 648
10.5 Input Data 650
10.5.1 Zero Level Substructure (superelement) 650
10.5.2 Level n Substructure 653
10.5.3 The Command CALCULATE 656
10.5.4 Automatic Link Generator (A.L.G.) 658
10.6 Procedures associated with Substructure 662
CONTENTS
10.7 Conclusions 663
CHAPTER 11 DYNAMIC 665

11.2 Eigenmodes and Eigenfrequencies - Direct Methods 668
11.2.1 Real Eigenmodes and Eigenfrequencies 668
11.2.2 Real Eigenfrequencies and Eigenmodes with Fluid-Structure Interaction 697
11.2.3 Complex Eigenfrequencies and Eigenmodes (Symmetrical Matrices) 704
11.2.4 Complex Eigenfrequencies and Eigenmodes (Non-Symmetrical Matrices) 709
11.3 Real Eigenmodes and Eigenfrequencies - Modal Synthesis 713
11.3.1 General 713
11.3.2 Description of Methods 714
11.3.3 Description of a Physical Super-Element 719
11.3.4 Description of Computation Steps 720
11.3.5 File Management 722
11.3.7 Example: Uniform Clamped-Free Beam 736
11.3.8 Experimental Super-Elements 741
11.3.9 Dynamic Automatic Link Generator (D.A.L.G.) 749
11.4 Dynamic Response - Modal Method 751
11.4.1 General 751
11.4.2 Modal Forces - Representativeness of the Modal Base 756
11.4.3 Transient Response (Modal Analysis) 767
11.4.4 Harmonic Response 783
11.4.5 Stochastic Dynamics 790
11.4.6 Seismic Response - Spectral Method 800
11.4.7 Consistant Modal Matrices Method 818
11.5 Harmonic Loads - Direct Method 823
11.5.1 General 823
11.5.3 Results 827
11.6 Sensitivity Analysis 829
11.6.1 General 829
11.6.2 Analytical Re-Analysis in the Modal Base 830
11.6.3 Complete Re-Analysis in the Modal Base 833
11.7 Utility Modules 841
11.7.1 Equivalent Modal Damping 841
11.7.2 Generation of Spectral Response 844
11.7.3 Computation of Effective Masses and Effective Inertia 852
11.7.4 Transient Dynamic 854
CHAPTER 12 TRANSIENT 861

12.1 Overview 861
12.1.2 Time-Related Scheme 862
12.1.3 Special Features 863
12.1.4 Commands 864

© 2019 ESI Group
CONTENTS
12.2 Linear Thermal Analysis 865

12.2.2 Forced Convection 866
12.2.3 Use of Routine 867
12.2.4 Example of a Quadratic Mesh Treatment 873
12.3 Linear Elasticity 875
12.3.1 General Equation 875
12.3.2 General 876
12.3.3 Use of Routine 877
12.3.4 Relations 883
12.3.5 Calculation of Forces 885
12.4 Non-Linear Dynamic Analysis 888
12.4.2 Detail of Time-Related Scheme 891
12.4.3 Utilization of the Routine 892
12.4.4 Combination between Non-Linearities and Algorithms 913
12.4.5 Relations 915
12.4.6 HISTORY and TRANSIENT Files 920
12.5 Non-Linear Static Analysis 923
12.5.1 General Equation 923
12.5.2 Implicit Algorithm 924
12.5.3 Utilization 924
12.5.4 Substructuring 925
12.6 Transient Shell 929
12.6.1 Mechanical 929
12.6.2 Thermal 941
12.7 Utility Routines 944
12.7.2 Transient Thermo-Mechanical Analysis: the TEMPERATURE Command 944
12.7.3 Manipulation of the TRANSIENT File - The SELECT Command 949
12.8 Transfer of Physical Quantities from Mesh to Mesh 952
12.9 Element Activation/Deactivation 962
12.9.2 Activation/Deactivation Function 962
12.9.3 Input Data: Element Properties 963
12.9.4 Input Data: Definition of Initial State 964
12.9.5 Data Storage 964
12.9.6 Practical Tips 964
12.9.7 Examples 965
INDEX i

© 2019 ESI Group
Contents
CHAPTER 13 POST PROCESSING 971

13.2 Average Node Stress and Strain 977
13.2.3 Files 979
13.2.4 Method of Calculation 980
13.2.6 Example 982
13.2.7 Location of Gaussian Points for Calculation of Stress 983
13.2.8 Average for Thick Shells 988
13.2.9 Average Transient 990
13.3 Combination of Results 993
13.3.2 Linear Combinations 994
13.3.3 Quadratic and Absolute Combination 996
13.3.4 Storage on File of Combinations 997
13.3.5 Combination of Fourier Series Terms (harmonics) 999
13.3.6 Complex Combination 1001
13.4 Merging of Results 1003
13.4.2 The Command MERGE 1004
13.4.3 Merging of Posts 1006
13.4.4 Merging of Cards 1007
13.4.5 Merging of Transient Files 1008
13.5 Cross Sections 1009
13.5.2 Files 1009
13.5.3 Method of Calculation 1010
13.5.5 Input data 1011
13.5.6 Example 1017
13.6 Postprocessing Module 1018
13.6.2 Files 1019
13.6.5 Example 1029
CONTENTS
13.7 Printing of Results 1033

13.7.1 The PRINT Command 1033
13.7.2 The Command PRINT TRANSIENT or MODE 1035
13.7.3 Command PRINT CONSTRAINTS 1037
13.8 The Command REARRANGE 1039
13.9 The Command FORCE 1040
13.10 The Command STRESS 1042
13.10.1 General Case 1043
13.10.2 Stresses in Laminated Shells 1046
13.10.3 Stresses in Beams using Section Database 1047
13.11 The command SPLIT 1054
13.12 The Command MINMAX 1056
13.13 The Command SHELL 1057
13.14 Three-Dimensional 1061
13.15 Local 1065
13.15.2 Files 1065
13.15.3 Input Data 1066
13.15.4 Example 1071
13.16 A Posteriori Error Estimator 1076
13.16.1 General 1076
13.16.2 Application Fields 1077
13.16.3 Input Data 1077
13.16.4 Error Analysis 1077
CHAPTER 14 POSTPROCESSING AND GRAPHIC OUTPUT 1079

14.2 Open - Close 1081
14.3 Post-Processing File Result Conversion 1082
14.3.1 CONVERT Procedure 1082
14.3.2 Post-Processing File Conversion - Printout 1084
14.3.3 Dataset 1085
14.4 Averaging Post-Processing 1098
14.5 Visualization of Results 1101
14.6 The Command CURVE POSTPROCESSING 1112
14.6.3 Example 1115
14.7 The Command CURVE TRANSIENT 1116
14.8 The Command CURVE FUNCTION 1121
14.9 The Command CURVE SATURATION 1122
14.10 The Command CURVE TABULATION 1123
14.11 The Command CURVE AVERAGE 1124
14.12 Specific Post-Processing for Nonlinear Dynamic Analysis 1127

© 2019 ESI Group
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 15 TOPOLOGY OF ELEMENTS 1131
CHAPTER 16 SYSTEMS OF AXES 1133

16.1 Global Axes (X, Y, Z) 1133
16.2 Local Axes (x, y, z) 1134
16.2.1 One-Dimensional Elements 1134
16.2.2 Two-Dimensional Elements 1136
16.2.3 Three-Dimensional Elements 1143
CHAPTER 17 MATERIAL BEHAVIOR LAWS 1145

17.1 Notations 1145
17.2 Elasticity 1147
17.2.1 General 1147
17.2.2 Isotropic Linear Elasticity 1149
17.2.3 Anisotropic Linear Elasticity 1151
17.2.4 Non-Linear Elasticity 1154
17.3 Elastoplasticity 1159
17.3.1 Theory 1160
17.3.2 User-Programmed Criterion 1168
17.3.3 Description of Models and Input Data 1172
17.4 Viscoplasticity 1209
17.4.2 Non-Unified Elasto-Viscoplastic Models 1210
17.4.3 Unified Elasto-Viscoplastic Models (Model = 21) 1213
17.4.4 Chaboche Model 1216
17.4.5 Thermo-Elasto-Viscoplastic Behavior Models (Model = 51) 1218
17.4.6 Rigid Viscoplastic Model (Model = 61) 1219
17.4.7 Elastoviscoplastic Model Coupled with Creep Damage (Model 71) 1221
17.4.8 Creep Models Applicable to Tube Elements 1223
17.5 Viscoelasticity 1226
17.5.2 Generalized MAXWELL Model (Linear Viscoelasticity) (Model = 11) 1227
17.5.3 Thermo-Viscoelastic Model (Model = 12) 1229
17.5.4 Non-Linear Viscoelasticity Model (Model = 13) 1234
17.6 Hyperelasticity 1236
17.6.1 Theory 1236
17.7 User-Programmed Behavior Law 1240
17.7.1 Principle 1240
17.7.2 Programming and Interpretation of Arguments 1241
17.8 Large Displacements and Large Strains 1247
17.8.1 Spatial Beam and Shell Options 1247
17.8.2 Two-Dimensional and Three-Dimensional Options 1249
17.9 Transient File Force Contents 1251

© 2019 ESI Group
CONTENTS
17.9.2 General Structure of the Force File 1252

17.9.3 Spatial SHELL - Spatial BEAM Option 1254
17.9.4 Two-Dimensional Option 1262
17.9.5 Three-Dimensional Option 1272
17.9.6 COQ8 Three-Dimensional Shell Option 1282
17.9.7 COQD Axisymmetrical Harmonic Shell Option 1283
17.9.8 COQT Thermal Shell Option 1284
17.10 References 1285
CHAPTER 18 COMMON BLOCKS 1289

18.1 Blank Common 1289
18.2 Common COMAIL 1293
18.3 Common COMMAT and COMMIL 1294
18.4 Common COMTRA 1304
CHAPTER 19 RIK'S METHOD 1305

19.1 General 1305
19.2 Constant Arc-Length Incrementation 1306
19.3 Variable Arc-Length Incrementation: Arc-Length Updated at Each Increment 1309
19.4 Variable Arc-Length Incrementation associated with a Buckling Calculation 1310
19.5 Note 1311
CHAPTER 20 SECTION MANAGEMENT DATABASE 1313

20.1 Simple Database Section 1314
20.2 Standard Database Section 1315
CHAPTER 21 LINEAR EQUATION SOLVERS 1319

21.2 Characteristics 1321
21.2.1 Standard Solvers 1321
21.2.2 External Solvers 1323
21.2.3 Summary Table of Solvers Properties 1323
21.3 Input Data 1324
21.3.1 Type 1324
21.3.2 Properties 1324
21.3.3 Parameters 1325
21.3.4 Extract Labels for the Treatment 1326
21.4 Notes 1327
CHAPTER 22 SPACE TRANSFORMATIONS 1329

22.2 Infinite Unidirectional Transformation (type 1) 1331
22.3 Ring or Sphere Transformation (Type 2) 1332
22.4 Square Ring or Square Sphere Transformation (Type 4) 1333
22.5 User Transformation (Type 8 or 9) 1334
22.6 Post-Processing 1335

© 2019 ESI Group
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 23 DYNAMIC ELEMENTS OF ROTORS 1337

23.1 Generalities - Modelization 1337
23.2 Complex Eigenfrequencies 1338
23.3 Harmonic Stationnary Response 1339
23.4 Time History Excitation Response 1340
23.5 Example 1341
INDEX i
SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL -v-

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
EXPORT 97
INDEX EXTRACT
FILE
322, 333
300
FRACTURE 300
FUNCTION 299
(VOL.1) GEOMETRY 118
GOTO 54
GROUP 42
A HISTORY 64
HYDROSTATIC 299
ASCII 72 IMPORT 97
Automatic Number Generation 29 INCREMENTATION 301
INPUT 83
INPUT/OUTPUT 80
B LEVEL 299
LEVELSETS 195
Batch Mode 32 LINEARISE 266
Boundary Conditions 19 LIST 331
LOADS 146
MASS 169
C MASTER 293
MATERIAL PROPERTIES 132
Command MEDIA 136, 319
$FORMAT 123 MISES 299
ADD 241 MODE 63
ASEMBLE 264 MODIFY 251
ASSIGN 56 MULTI 310
ASSOCIATE 273, 280, 290-292, 295 NODES 214
AXES 122, 238 OFFSET 259
CHECK 324 ONE-DIMENSIONAL 204
CONSTRAINTS 138 OPTION 114, 301
CONTACTOR 283, 290 OUTPUT 80
COORDINATES 120, 238 PAGING 63
COORDINATES CARTESIAN 120 PARALLELEPIPED 202
COORDINATES CYLINDRICAL 120 POINTS 54
COORDINATES POLAR 120 RBE 293
COORDINATES SPHERICAL 121 READ 57
CORRECT 239, 262 RECTANGLE 200
Crack 300 RELATION 161
CRACK 260 RELATION ELIMINATION 164
CRACKS 197 RELEASE 158
CRITERION 274, 281, 290-291, 295 REMESH 298
DAMPING 172 RENUMBER 243, 261
DEASSIGN 57 RESTART 244, 250
DEFAULT 134 RETRO 309
DEFINITION 108, 238 RETURN 108
DEFINITION RESTART 110 REWIND 58
DELETE 77 SAVE 72
EDGE 215 SEARCH 75
ELEMENTS 125, 215 SECTION 270
END 62 SECTOR 207
EQUILIBRIUM ENERGY 337 SINGULARITY 215
EQUILIBRIUM FORCE 334 SLAVE 293
EQUILIBRIUM MASS 336 SLIDING 281, 290
EQUILIBRIUM STIFFNESS 335 SOURCE 274, 290-291
ERROR 54 STOP 58
SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL -i-

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
SUPPRESS 216 Stiffnesses 70

SURA 296 Transient 69
SURB 296 TRANSIENT 94
SURFACE 263 File Management 4
TABLE 178
TARGET 274, 283, 290, 292
TEMPERATURE 175, 299
G
THERMAL 295
TIME 62 Generation of Sequences of Nodes and
TRIANGLE 244 Elements 128
VELOCITY 177
VERIFY 249, 332 I
Concentrated Loads 150
Consistent Masses 170 Interactive Mode 32
Coordinate System 38, 120 Interface Nodes 217
Coordinate Systems 19
Creation of a Group 42 L
D Label
ALPHA 208, 225
Definition of Nodes 119 AXES 208
CARTESIAN 120
Degrees of Freedom 18
CLOSED 225
Discretization 18 COORD 43
Distributed Loads 152 CYLINDRICAL 120
DAMPING 337
E ELEMENT 43
FORCE 274
Elastic Constraints at Nodes 143 GENERATE 204, 208
GROUP 329
Elastic Constraints over Elements 145 LAST 300
LENGHT 208
F LENGTH 225
LOWER 43
File MEDIUM 261
Direct Access 68, 183 MIDDLE 221
Displacements-Reactions-Forces-Nodal NODE 43
Stresses-Strains 69 POLAR 120
Eigenvectors 70 PRECISION 44
History 70 PROGRESSION 208
Input Data 69 RELATIVE 154
INTERFACE 84 SPHERICAL 120
Labels 78 STEP 225
Local 68 UNTIL 155
Mass-Buckling-Damping 70 UPPER 43
Matrix 70 Labels and Numbers 36
Media 69 Loads 20
Modal 70 Loads Applied to Beams 154
Permanent 68, 71
Postprocessing 70 Loads Applied to Media 157
Random Access 68
RESULT 94 M
Sequential 68, 182
Sequential Stress File 69 Macro Element 218

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
Modify Three-Dimensional 228

Coincident nodes 253 TIED Elements 291
Constraints 252 Types of Analysis 115
Coordinates 252
Isolated nodes 254
Offset 259 U
Orientation 254
Vectors 252 Units 20
N V
Node and Element Numbering Systems 20 Vectorial Functions of Several Variables 189
O
Operating System Commands 64
P
PAMSYS 101
Periodic Structures Subjected to Fourier
Decomposed Loads 117
Postprocessing 4
Prefixes 36
Preprocessing 4
Programmed Meshes
Specification of Trajectories 314
Types of Element Generated 312
R
RBE Elements 292
REFERENTIEL
DEGRES 38
GRADES 38
RADIANS 38
TANGENTE 38
S
Simplified Fortran 185
Singularities 220
Slide Plane 277
Substructuring 6
T
Thermal Analysis in Linear Transient 171
Thermal Analysis in Non-Linear Transient 174
Thermoelastic Analysis 116

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
SHELL 565
INDEX SOLID
SOLVE HARMONIC
565
464
Computed Results
(VOL.2) Axisymmetric or Translation Shell Option
Beams Option
401
377
Grids Option 361
Plane Truss Option 382
A Plate Option 394
SHED axisymmetric harmonic shell option 553
Applied Loads Shell Axisymmetric Fluid Harmonic Option 493
Axisymmetric or Translation Shell Option 399 Shell Fluid Option 498
Beams Option 373 Shell Harmonic Option 475
Grids Option 359 Shell Option 431
Plane Beam Option 351 Shell SHE8 Option 545
Plane Truss Option 380 SHET Thermal Shell Option 558
Plate Option 393 Three Dimensional Harmonic Option 485
SHED Axisymmetric Harmonic Shell Option 551 Three Dimensional Option 462
Shell Axisymmetric Fluid Harmonic Option 492 Truss Option 388
Shell Fluid Option 498 Two Dimensional Option 450
Shell Harmonic Option 473 Constraints
Shell Option 422 Axisymmetric or Translation Shell Option 398
Shell SHE8 Option 541 Beams Option 371
SHET Thermal Shell Option 557 Grids Option 358
Three Dimensional Harmonic Option 483 Plane Beam Option 350
Three Dimensional Option 459 Plane Truss Option 379
Truss Option 386 Plate Option 392
Two Dimensional Option 447 SHED Axisymmetric Harmonic Shell Option 550
Axisymmetric of Translation Shell Option Shell Axisymmetric Fluid Harmonic Option 492
Applied Loads 399 Shell Fluid Option 497
Computed Results 401 Shell Harmonic Option 472
Constraints 398 Shell Option 421
Material Properties 396 Shell SHE8 Option 538
SHET Thermal Shell Option 557
B Three Dimensional Harmonic Option 482
Three Dimensional Option 458
Truss Option 384
Beam/Solid Transition Element 510 Two Dimensional Option 446
Beams Option 363 Contacts 582
Applied Loads 373
Computed Results 377 Continuous Three Dimensional Frames 363
Constraints 350, 371 Coupled Analyses 488
Geometry of Section 366 Criterion
List of Elements 364 Hill 417
Material Properties 365 Tsai 418
C E
Coaxial Cylinders 500 Eccentricity
Command Shell option 411
BEAM 565 Electromagnetic Analyses 487
COMPATIBILITY 565
DEFINITION MEDIUM 609
MATERIAL PROPERTIES 515
MIXING 565

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
F SC3D 601
SL2D 592, 601
SPHERE 597
Family TORUS 597
2003-2004 405
2006-2008 407
Material Properties
2203-2204 405 Axisymmetric or Translation Shell Option 396
2403-2404 405, 407 Beams Option 365
Grids Option 356
Fluid-Structure Interaction 489 Plane Beam Option 348
Plane Truss Option 379
G Plate Option 391
SHED Axisymmetric Harmonic Shell Option 549
Generalized Contact 597 Shell Axisymmetric Fluid Harmonic Option 491
Grids Option 355 Shell Fluid Option 497
Applied Loads 359 Shell Harmonic Option 467
Computed Results 361 Shell Option 410
Constraints 358 Shell SHE8 Option 535
Material Properties 356 SHET Thermal Shell Option 556
Three Dimensional Harmonic Option 479
I Truss Option 384
Two Dimensional Option 440
Interpretation of Computed Results 341 Mixing Option 559
L O
Label Option
FAST 584 Plane Beam 347
MULTI 560 Plane Truss 378
PENALTY 584 Plate 389
List of Elements SHE8 Spatial Shell 533
Beams Option 364 SHED Axisymmetric Harmonic Shell 548
Plane Truss Option 379 Shell 402
SHED Axisymmetric Harmonic Shell Option 549 Shell Axisymmetric Fluid Harmonic 490
Shell Axisymmetric Fluid Harmonic Option 491 Shell Fluid 495
Shell Fluid Option 496 Shell Harmonic 465
Shell Option Option 403 SHET Thermal Shell Option 555
Shell SHE8 Option 535 Three Dimensional 451
SHET Thermal Shell Option 556 Three Dimensional Harmonic 477
Three Dimensional Harmonic Option 479 Two Dimensional 435
Truss Option 384
Two Dimensional Option 438
P
Plane Beam Option
M Applied Loads 351
Constraints 350
Macro Elements Material Properties 348
CONE 597 Plane Truss Option
CYLINDER 597 Applied Loads 380
GAP 583 Computed Results 382
INTERFACE 587 Constraints 379
NIT3D 605 List of Elements 379
PLANE 589, 597 Material Properties 379
RECTANGLE 597

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
Plate Option Thermo-Elastic Properties of Anisotropic

Applied Loads 393 Shell Elements 412
Computed Results 394 Thermo-Elastic Properties of Isotropic Shell
Constraints 392 Elements 412
Material Properties 391 Shell SHE8 Option
Printing of Results 342 Applied Loads 541
Default Element Type Codes 345 Computed Results 545
Displacements 342 Constraints 538
Forces 343 Material Properties 535
Reactions 342 Shell/Solid Transition Element 509
Special Case of Beams 343 Shells specially Designed for Non-Linear
Type pf Structure (Number) 345
Analysis 533
SHET Thermal Shell Option
R Applied Loads 557
Computed Results 558
Regulation-Adjustment Medium 578 Constraints 557
Residues 341 List of Elements 556
Material Properties 556
S Special Constraint Element 527
Special Contact Element 513
Sandwich Materials 420 Special Elements 505
SHED Axisymmetric Harmonic Shell
Option T
Applied Loads 551
Computed Results 553 Tabulated Element 506
Constraints 550 Thermal Analysis 487
Three Dimensional Harmonic Option
Shell Axisymmetric Fluid Harmonic Option Applied Loads 483
Applied Loads 492 Computed Results 485
Computed Results 493 Constraints 482
Constraints 492 List of Elements 479
List of Elements 491 Material Properties 479
Three Dimensional Option
Shell Fluid Option Applied Loads 459
Applied Loads 498 Computed Results 462
Computed Results 498 Constraints 458
Constraints 497 List of Elements 454
List of Elements 496 Material Properties 454
Shell Harmonic Option Reduced Integration Rule for an Element 457
Applied Loads 473 Trajectory Loading Medium 608
Computed results 475
Constraints 472
Transition Element 511
Material Properties 467 Truss Option 383
Applied Loads 386
Shell Option
Applied Loads 422
Constraints 384
List of Elements 384
Constraints 421
Definition of Pressure 425
Excentricity 411 Two Dimensional Option
Geometrical Properties 410 170X Elements 439
List of Elements 403 Applied Loads 447
Material Properties 410 Computed Results 450
Constraints 446

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
List of Elements 438

Overall Axisymmetric Behavior 437
Overall Plane Strain Behavior 437
Reduced Integration Rule for an Element 445

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
INITIAL
INDEX CONDITION
S 776, 869, 879, 903, 937, 941
INITIAL CONDITIONS RESTART 905
(VOL.3) INTEGRATION 793
LEVEL CROSSING 795
LIMITS 677
A LINK 659, 749
LOAD 632, 735, 759
MAXIMA 795
Automatic Link Generator 658
METHOD 845, 900
MODAL ANALYSIS 770
C MODE 674, 677, 680, 682-683, 687,
698, 705, 786, 805, 826
Combination between Non-Linearities and MODIFICATION 830
Algorithms 913 MODIFY 727
Command MOMENT 793
ACCELEROGRAM 845 PARTICIPATION 758, 761
ACCELEROGRAM TRANSIENT 846 PARTICIPATION MULTI 762
ALGORITHM 775, 894, 930 PRECISION 898
ALGORITME IMPLICIT 868 PRINT 779, 942
ASSEMBLE DYNAMIC 731, 734 PRINT COMPLETE 938
AXES 831 PRINT VALUES 676
BANDWITH 795 PROJECT 953
BEHAVIOUR 900, 929, 941 PSD 791
CALCULATE 632, 656, 792-794 PSEUDO MODAL 833
CALCULATE DYNAMIC 728 REGIME 941
CARD 780, 792-793, 950 RELATION 883
CHECK 659 RELEASE 659
CIRCULAR FREQUENCY 786, 826 RESIDUAL TERMS 762
COMBINATION 778 RESPONSE 825, 831
COMBINE 805 RESULTS 779
COMPLEX MODES 710 RUNEND 911
COMPONENTS 726 SELECT 676, 771, 779, 785, 834, 842, 949
CONNECTION 658, 727, 749 SENSITIVITY 830
CONTACT 632 SEQUENCE 691
DAMPING754, 772, 785, 806, 825, 842, 845, 910 SIL 910
DEFECT TRANSIENT 937 SOLVE 613, 616, 668, 877
DIMENSION 941 SOLVE BUCKLING 695
DIMENSION MEMORY 929 SOLVE FORCE TRANSIENT 885
DIRECTION 806, 814 SOLVE FORCES MODAL 689, 707
DISPLACEMENT 813 SOLVE HARMONIC 622
DURATION 806 SPECTRAL ANALYSIS 805
EFFECTIVE MASS 852 SPECTRAL ANALYSIS MULTIPLE 812
ELEMENT 710, 834 SPECTRUM 806, 813
FATIGUE 795 STATIC 812, 933
FREQUENCY 786, 826 STIFFNESS 727
FREQUENCY INITIAL 845 STOCHASTIC 794
FRONT 699 STOP 772
FUNCTION 771, 779, 785, 791, 878, 903 STRAIN GENERALISED 902
GAP 632 SUBSTRUCTURE 653
GENERATION 845 SUBSTRUCTURE DYNAMIC 725-726
HARMONIC RESPONSE MODAL 785 SUMMATION 695
SUPER ELEMENT 650
SUPERELEMENT DYNAMIC 725

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
SUPPRESS 676
TABLE 711, 772, 779, 786, 792, 807, 834, 878, G
903
TEMPERATURE 624, 944 Generation of Spectral Response 844
TEMPERATURE TRANSIENT 944
TEMPERATURE TRANSIENT SHELL 929, 947 H
TIME 777, 941
TITLE 771, 779 Harmonic Loads - Direct Method 823
TRANSFER 786
TRANSIENT 864, 877-878
Harmonic Response 783
TRANSIENT NON LINEAR 892, 921
UNIDIRECTIONAL 773 L
VECTOR 680, 687, 699, 706, 711, 835
Complex Eigenfrequencies and Eigenmodes Label
(Non-Symmetrical Matrices 709 ABSOLUTE 814, 898
ACCELERATION 692
Complex Eigenfrequencies and Eigenmodes ALL 710
(Symmetrical Matrices) 704 AMPLITUDE 855
Computation of Effective Masses and ARCHIVATE 892
Effective Inertia 852 BEAMS 692
Coupled Friction 917 BERGAN 895
BFGS 894
Cylindrical Stop 773 BINARY 921
BLOCK 687, 730
D BUCKLING 674
CARD 624, 855, 869, 879, 904, 956
Decoupled Friction 917 CARDS 885
Detail of Time-Related Scheme 891 CIRCULAR FREQUENCY 677, 680, 687
COMPACT 870, 880, 906
DYNAMIC 687, 698, 793-794, 812, 825
COMPLEX 885
Dynamic Responses 665 CONDENSATION 698
CONSTRAINT REMOVE 905
E CONTACT 896
DATA 954
Eigenfrequencies and Eigenmodes 665 DEFORMED CARD 953
Enumeration of Eigenvalues (Sturm DESACTIVATE 910
DIAGONAL 675, 682, 687
Sequences) 694 DIRECTION 761
Equivalent Modal Damping 841 DISPLA 770
DISPLACEMENT 899
F DT tshift 944
DTLAST 906
File DURATION dt 905
FMDAT.DAT 895 EDIT 791
HISTORY 920 ENERGY 899
MASD 723 EQUIVALENT STRESSES 692
RESU 722 EULER 901
RIGD 723 EXTRACT 729, 885, 893, 905
SPECnf.DAT 848 FACTOR 680
TRANSIENT 920 FILE 732
VECD 723 FILTER 885
FLUID 771, 779
FLUID STRUCTURE 698
FORCE 706, 759, 770, 898
FORCES 675
FREQUENCY 677, 680, 684, 687

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
GENERATE 624 RIGID 759, 770

GIVENS 674 RIKS 895, 904
GRAD 894 SAVE 895
GROUP 895 SCALING 867, 877, 892
GUYAN 683 SEARCH 885, 895
GYROSCOPIC 710 SELECT 954
HYPERELASTIC 901 SEMI-QUADRATIC 814
INITIAL 870, 906 SHELL 692
INVERSE POWER 674 SHELL THERMAL 941
ITERATION 680, 687, 706 SHIFT 674, 683, 687, 730
ITERATIONS 730, 894 SIZE 675, 682
ITERATIVE 680 SKIP 870, 880, 906
ITMAXIMAL 894 STATIC 892
JAUMAN 902 STEP 895
JOURNAL 892 STRESS 898, 953
LARDIS 899 STURM 685, 688
LARGE 899 SUPER ELEMENT 926
LAST 869, 879, 904, 956 SUSPACE 674
LINEAR 895 TOLERANCE 899
LINEARIZE 867 TOTLAGRANGE 901
LINK 732 UNIT 898
LOG 791 UPDLAGRANGE 901-902
LOWER 677 UPPER 677
LSEARCH 896 VARIABLE 855
MAXF 899 VECTOR 729
MEITERATION 895 VERIFY 892
METHOD 955 VISCOELASTIC 901
MODULUS 711 WATCH 910
MULTI 759, 770 Linear Elasticity 875
NOCHECK 729 Linear Thermal Analysis 865
NON LINEAR 892
NORM 675, 699, 899
OPTIMIZE 894 M
OTHER 730
PARAMETER EPSILON 956 Material Stop 774
PARAMETER EXTERIOR 955 Method
PARAMETER INTERIOR 956 GIVENS 676
PENALTY 896 INVERSE POWER 677
PERTURBATION 894 ITERATIVE SUBSPACE 679
PHASE 855 Lanczos subspace 682
PLASTIC 901 Lanczos SUBSPACE Method with BLOCK
PRECISION 680, 688, 730 Option 686
PREDICTION 895 Lanczos SUBSPACE Method with GUYAN
PRINT 675, 699, 729, 732 Option 683
PSD 791 Modal Forces - Representativeness of the
PULSATION 684
RATIO 710 Modal Base 756
REAL 885 Modal Method 751
REBUILT 892 Modal Synthesis 713
REDUCTION 684 Modification of the Mass Matrix 671
REFORM 894 Modification of the Stiffness Matrix 671
RELAXATION 894
REMESH 954
Mono-Spectral analysis 803
RESIDUAL 730 Multi-Spectral Analysis 811
RESIDUE 886
RESTART 869-870, 879-880, 904, 906

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
N Z
Non-linear Dynamic Analysis 888 Zero Level Substructure 650
Non-Linear Static Analysis 923
O
Option
Axisymmetrical Harmonic 802
Fluid-Structure 802
P
Participation Factors 756
Plane Frictional Stop 774
R
Real Eigenfrequencies and Eigenmodes with
Fluid-Structure Interaction 697
Response Power Spectral Density 790
S
Seismic Response - Spectral Method 800
Sensitivity Analysis 666, 829
Simultaneous Modification of Stiffness and
Mass Matrices 671
Stochastic Dynamics 790
Substructure Modes 714
Substructuring 925
T
Thermoelastic Analysis 623
Transfer Functions 783
Transient Dynamic 854
Transient Response (Modal Analysis) 767
Transient Shell 929
U
Unidirectional Frictional Stop 773
Unidirectional Stop 772
Utility Modules 666

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
MEDIUM 1117
INDEX MERGE
METHOD
1004
1324
MINMAX 1056
(VOL.4) MODE
NODES
1035
1013, 1025, 1117
NUMBER 1084
A OPEN 1081
POINTS 1013
POSTPROCESSING 1021
Anisotropic Linear Elasticity 1151 PRINT 1033, 1035
Average for Thick Shells 988 PRINT CONSTRAINTS 1037
PRINT POINT 1034
C REARRANGE 1039
RETURN 992, 1028, 1066
Code SECTION 1048
COMMON PAGE 1289 SELECT 1066
KDEBT 1289 SELECT ELEMENTS 1048
LCODE 1289 SET 1113
NCODE 1289 SHELL 1057
SOLVE 978
Command
SPLIT 1054
AVERAGE 981, 988
STRESS 1042
AVERAGE TRANSIENT 991
STRESS SECTION 1048
AVERAGING POST-PROCESSING 1099
THREE-DIMENSIONAL 1062-1063
AXES 1026
TRANSF 1027
CARD 991, 1116
TRANSIENT 1035
CLOSE 1081
UNITS 1048
COMBINE 994, 1028, 1063
USER 1048
COMBINE FOURIER 999
VISUALIZATION 1101
COMPONENTS 992
CORRECTION 981 Criterion
CROSS SECTION 1011 Drucker-Prager 1162, 1173
CURVE AVERAGE 1124 Stassi 1163, 1174
CURVE FUNCTION 1121 Tsai-Hill 1163, 1174
CURVE POST PROCESSING 1112 User 1164
CURVE SATURATION 1122 User-programmed 1174
CURVE TABULATION 1123 Von Mises 1161, 1172
CURVE TRANSIENT 1116 Cross Sections 1009
DAMPING GYROSCOPIC 1340
DEASSIGN33 1338 D
DISTRIBUTION 1062, 1064
EDGE 1014 Dataset 1085
ELEMENT 981, 1117
ELEMENTS 989, 991, 1014, 1024
EXTRACT CODES 1289 E
FORCE 1040
FORMAT 1113, 1117 Elasticity 1147
GENERATE 1062, 1064 Elastoplasticity 1159
GRID 1014
HEADER 1014, 1026
LINE 1014
I
LOAD 1048, 1063, 1066
LOCAL 1066 Isotropic Linear Elasticity 1149
MATERIALS 1025
MATRIX 1026

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
TUBE 1022
L UNBALANCE 1339
UPPER 989
Label VARIABLE 989, 1002
ALL 1040 VMISE 1023
AMPLITUDE 1001 Large Displacements and Large Strains 1247
ASYNCHRONOUS 1339
Local Axes
AXES 989
One-Dimensional Elements 1134
AXISYMMETRIC 1023
Three-Dimensional Elements 1143
BEAM 1024
Two-Dimensional Elements 1136
CARD 1035
COARSE 1066 Location of Gaussian Points for Calculation
COMPONENTS 1034 of Stress 983
COMPOSITE 1059
CRITERION HILL 1059 M
DATASET 1084, 1100
DELTA 991 Merging of Cards 1007
DISPLACEMENT 991
ENERGY 1040 Merging of Posts 1006
EXTRACT 989, 1046 Merging of Results 1003
EXTRAPOLATION 1099 Merging of Transient Files 1008
FINE 1066 Model
FORCE COMPOSITE 1024 Chaboche 1216
GYROSCOPIC 1338-1339 Generalized Maxwell Hardening (Linear
HILL 1060 Viscoelasticity 1227
INPLA 1023 Model=1, Perfect Plasticity 1172
INPUT 1100 Model=10, Ductile Damage Model with
INREV 1023 Isotropic Strain Hardening - Leblond
INTEGRAL 991 – Perrin Model 1195
INTRI 1023 Model=11, Plasticity with combined Strain-
LAST 991, 1035
Hardening - isotropic strain
LAYER 989, 1046, 1059
hardening and PRAGER kinematic
LOWER 989
strain hardening 1184
MASS 1040
Model=12, Plasticity with combined strain
MISE 1022
MODE 1035 hardening and RAMBERG-OSGOOD
MULTIPLY 1022 strain hardening law 1184
NORM 1119 Model=13, Ductile Damage Model with
ONLY 989 Combined Isotropic and Kinematic
OUTPUT 1100 Strain Hardening - Leblond – Perrin
PART 1100 Model 1196
PHASE 1001 Model=14 Gurson - Tvergaard Model 1197
PRESSURE 1099 Model=2, Plasticity with Isotropic Strain-
PRINCIPAL 1022 Hardening 1175
PRINT 1084 Model=2, Plasticity with Prager Kinematic
SHELL 989 Strain-Hardening 1179
SHELL COMPOSITE 989 Model=21 Global Perfect Elastoplasticity
SPATIAL 1012 Model Applicable to Thin Shell
STRAIN 1046 Elements - Simplified Model 1197
STRESS 991 Model=22 Global Perfect Elastoplasticity
SUM 1118 Model Applicable to Thin Shell
THIN SHELL 1023 Elements 1198
THREE DIMENSIONAL 1022
THRESHOLD 991, 1099
TRANSF 1024
TSAI 1059

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
Model=23 Global Elastoplasticity Model

with Kinematic Strain Hardening, R
Applicable to Thin Shell Elements -
Simplified Model 1198 Rik's Method 1305
with Kinematic Strain Hardening, S
Applicable to Thin Shell Element 1198
Model=25 Global Elastoplasticity Model Sky Line Solvers 1321
with Isotropic Strain Hardening, Standard Sparse Solvers 1322
Applicable to Thin Shell Elements - Strain-hardening 1165
Simplified Model 1199
Stresses in Laminated Shells 1046
with Isotropic Strain Hardening,
Applicable to Thin Shell Elements 1199 T
Model=4, Plasticity with Ductile Damage -
ROUSSELIER Model 1192 Three-Dimensional 1061
Model=5, Cyclic Plasticity -Von Mises
Criterion, EISENBERG Model 1184 U
Model=6, Plasticity with Kinematic Strain-
Hardening – Ramberg – Osgood User-Programmed Criterion 1168
Strain Hardening Law 1180
Model=7, Plasticity with isotropic Strain-
V
Hardening and Sensitivity to,load
Rapidity – Johnson Cook Law 1178
Model=7, Plasticity with Kinematic Strain-
Viscoelasticity 1226
Hardening RAMBERG-OSGOOD Viscoplasticity 1209
Strain Hardening Law 1177
Model=8, Cyclic Plasticity - Chaboche-
Marquis Model 1187
Model=8, Non-Linear Kinematic Strain-
Hardening Armstrong - Frederick 1180
Model=9, Ductile Damage Model with
kinematic Strain-Hardening -
Leblond – Perrin Model 1193
Non-Linear Viscoelasticity 1234
Rigid Viscoplastic 1219
Strain Hardening 1210
Thermo-Elasto-Viscoplastic Behavior 1218
Thermo-Viscoelastic 1229
Time Hardening 1211
Unified Elasto-Viscoplastic 1213
Viscous 1211
N
Non-Linear Elasticity 1154
Non-Unified Elasto-Viscoplastic Models 1210
P
Postprocessing 1018

© 2019 ESI Group
ABOUT ESI GROUP
ESI Group is a leading innovator in Virtual Prototyping software and services. Specialist in material physics, ESI
has developed a unique proficiency in helping industrial manufacturers replace physical prototypes by virtual
prototypes, allowing them to virtually manufacture, assemble, test and pre- certify their future products.
Coupled with the latest technologies, Virtual Prototyping is now anchored in the wider concept of the Product
Performance Lifecycle™, which addresses the operational performance of a product during its entire lifecycle,
from launch to disposal. The creation of a Hybrid Twin™, leveraging simulation, physics and data analytics,
Copyright © ESI Group, 2019
enables manufacturers to deliver smarter and connected products, to predict product performance and to
anticipate maintenance needs.
ESI is a French company listed in compartment B of NYSE Euronext Paris. Present in more than 40 countries,
and addressing every major industrial sector, ESI Group employs about 1200 high-level specialists around the
world and reported annual sales of €141 million in 2016. For more information, please visit www.esi-group.com.
All PAM- and SYS- product names as well as other products belonging to ESI's portfolio are tradenames or trademarks of ESI Group, unless specifically mentioned.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners - Specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
www.esi-group.com

SYSTUS RefManAnalysisVol2 en PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

SYSTUS RefManAnalysisVol2 en PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

SYSTUS

REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

CHAPTER 8 TYPES OF ANALYSIS 339

8.9.1 SHE8 Spatial Shell Option 533

- ii - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

CHAPTER 8 TYPES OF ANALYSIS

SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL - 339 -

8.1.1 Features Common to Analysis of All Types of Structure

accumulates during the analysis.

l support reactions at constrained nodes ;

dimensional elements and at the extremities of beams.

- 340 - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

excluding of course support reactions at constrained nodes.

8.1.3 Interpretation of Computed Results

SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL - 341 -

8.1.4 Printing of Results

These components are referred to the global axes.

- 342 - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL - 343 -

Type of Structure Computed

- 344 - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

Type of Structure Computed

Type of structure (number)

Number of Nodes

TABLE 8.2 – Default element type codes

SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL - 345 -

8.2 BEAMS AND PIN-JOINTED FRAMES

- 346 - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

8.2.2 Continuous Plane Frames

SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL - 347 -

OPTION PLANE BEAM

All beam elements are analyzed by the slope-deflection method.

- 348 - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL - 349 -

f. Transient analysis - damping

- 350 - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

b. Elastic constraints at nodes

SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL - 351 -

- 352 - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

l If the line L5 contains elements 1 to 10, only element 1 is taken into

SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL - 353 -

- 354 - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL - 355 -

- 356 - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

IG = ig Moment of polar inertia.

SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL - 357 -

- 358 - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

5. Applied Loads: Grids Option

SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL - 359 -

FZ = fz Components of force and moment.

e. Loads applied to beam elements

- 360 - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

Computed Results: Grids Option

SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL - 361 -

- 362 - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

8.2.4 Continuous Three Dimensional Frames

l plasticity in 1402 elements.

SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL - 363 -

All straight elements are analyzed by the slope-deflection method.

- 364 - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

The third point definition has priority over PHI definition.

SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL - 365 -

c. Geometry of section: Beams option